<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rezeau</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rezeau"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/Special:Contributions/Rezeau"/>
	<updated>2026-05-15T07:27:46Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Setting_up_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=115334</id>
		<title>Setting up a questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Setting_up_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=115334"/>
		<updated>2014-10-28T07:30:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Email */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created a questionnaire you can define extra settings in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; link/tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Questionnaire Type===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three types of questionnaires:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Private &#039;&#039;&#039; - belongs to the course it is defined in only. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; This is the standard Moodle module concept. You create a questionnaire and its questions for the course it is defined in. Editing teachers of that course can change the questionnaire and all teachers can review the results.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Template &#039;&#039;&#039; - can be copied and edited. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; This type of questionnaire cannot be used directly, but its content can be copied into a new questionnaire and edited.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Public &#039;&#039;&#039; - can be shared among courses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; If a questionnaire has already been created (in another course on the same Moodle site) with the &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; setting, then you may use that &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; questionnaire in your own course(s). The number of settings available to such questionnaires is limited and you cannot edit its questions nor view the responses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a public questionnaire has been created in course A, it can be &amp;quot;used&amp;quot; in courses B, C, ... All the responses from courses A, B, C, ... are collected in the public questionnaire created in course A (the original course where it was created) and are viewable there by the person (admin or teacher) who originally created it.&lt;br /&gt;
====Public questionnaire roll out to multiple courses====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create a Public questionnaire whose aliases can be placed in several courses. The student responses will only be visible in the course where the original Public questionnaire has been created. There are mainly 2 applications of this setup. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
case 1.- An admin may want to see course evaluations by students without the course teachers seeing those evaluations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
case 2.- A teacher teaching several courses may want to &amp;quot;consolidate&amp;quot; the results of several questionnaires (in his various courses) into one unique Public questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s how you do it (for case1)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a course that will simply be a shell for any public questionnaires. Give it whatever title you like, e.g. PubQuestCourse. You can hide the course entirely. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create your questionnaire in this course. Call it e.g. &amp;quot;Public questionnaire01&amp;quot; On the &amp;quot;Advanced settings&amp;quot; page, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039;&#039; for the questionnaire type.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add questions in this public questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Navigate to the course where you want to place an alias of that Public questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add an activity or resource: Questionnaire. Edit all the various settings. Name it e.g. Questionnaire01. For Response options|Type, we suggest you select Respond once. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2014-03-23 15-03-50.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the Content options section, in the radio buttons list, under Use public, the title of the public questionnaire you created in the other course (PubQuestCourse) will appear (e.g. Public questionnaire01): check its radio button. Then finish editing (click the Save and return to course button).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that starting with version 2.6, the Content options section now distinguishes &#039;&#039;Copy existing&#039;&#039; (for questionnaires in current course) from &#039;&#039;Use template&#039;&#039; (template courses may reside in other courses). Also, the course which each existing/available questionnaire belongs to is displayed between square brackets.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are not sure about the actual contents of a questionnaire you would like to &amp;quot;copy&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;use&amp;quot;, clicking on its title will link to a Preview pop-up window.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note.- For options 4-6 above, an admin may ask individual teachers to create those questionnaires based on a public questionnaire in their own courses, giving them detailed instructions on how to proceed. Unfortunately at the moment there is no way to automatically deploy a public questionnaire to other courses, it has to be done &amp;quot;by hand&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Student responses will appear in the original questionnaire (e.g. &amp;quot;Public questionnaire01&amp;quot; in course PubQuestCourse), but will not be visible at all in the &amp;quot;local&amp;quot; questionnaire (alias). Teachers will not be able to respond to it or view their students&#039; responses.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT&#039;&#039;&#039; Please note that when you delete a Public questionnaire, you also delete the links to its &amp;quot;dependent&amp;quot; questionnaires in the other courses on your moodle site. If a Public questionnaire is no longer used, the normal procedure is to go to all the other courses that &amp;quot;use&amp;quot; that Public questionnaire and delete them first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Template questionnaire used in multiple courses====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the responses to your questionnaire should remain accessible in the course in which it resides, but the questionnaire itself will follow a standard format with the same questions, use a template-type of questionnaire. So instead of re-creating the questions for each questionnaire, you can apply the template questionnaire to each one you create.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s how you do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a course that will simply be a shell for any template questionnaires. Give it whatever title you like e.g. TempQuestCourse. You can hide the course entirely. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create your questionnaire in this course. On the &amp;quot;Advanced settings&amp;quot; page, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Template&#039;&#039;&#039; for the questionnaire type.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add questions in this template questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Navigate to the course where you want to place an alias of that Template questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add an activity or resource: Questionnaire. Edit all the various settings. Name it e.g. Questionnaire02.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10-10-2013 10-07-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the Content options section, in the radio buttons list, under Copy existing, the title of the Template questionnaire you created in the other course (TempQuestCourse) will appear (e.g. Template questionnaire01): check its radio button. Then finish editing (click the Save and return to course button).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t want your teachers to view or alter questionnaire responses, just define this in the Define Roles settings for Questionnaires. In Define Roles, you can limit teachers from being able to delete responses from the questionnaire, or be able to submit their own questionnaires or view responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Title/Sub-title===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the questionnaire, which will appear at the top of every page. By default Title is set to the questionnaire Name, but you can edit it as you like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Info===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be displayed at the top of the first page of the questionnaire. (i.e. instructions, background info, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Confirmation URL/page===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heading (in bold) and body text for the &amp;quot;Confirmation&amp;quot; page displayed after a user completes this questionnaire. (URL, if present, takes precedence over confirmation text.) If you leave this field empty, a default message will be displayed upon questionnaire completion (&#039;&#039;Thank you for completing this Questionnaire&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a copy of each submission to the specified address or addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
You can provide more than one address by separating them with commas. Each address must be separated from the next by a comma only (&#039;&#039;no blank space&#039;&#039; before or after the comma).&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank for no email backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=115227</id>
		<title>URL resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=115227"/>
		<updated>2014-10-13T14:25:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Display */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{URL}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a URL resource to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu),choose URL. All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all/Collapse all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:urlgeneral25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the URL so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your page here. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Either enter the URL in the external URL field or click the &amp;quot;Choose a link&amp;quot; button to open the file picker and choose a URL YouTube, Picasa etc (depending on which [[Repositories|repositories]] are enabled for the site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:urlappearance.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above options are the default display options. Additional display options (see below) may be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
If your URL is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display URL name/description===&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the URL, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL variables==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:url.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to pass internal information as part of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful if the URL is actually an interactive web page that takes parameters, and you want to pass something like the name of the current user, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drag and Drop a URL==&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if an administrator has enabled the experimental feature drag and drop upload of text/links in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; [[Experimental settings]]&#039;&#039;, a link can be dragged into a section of the course and given a name, as shown in the images below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:dragURL.png|thumb|Adding a URL using drag and drop]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:view|View URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:addinstance|Add a new URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The URL module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note:If your theme has a large header then the height should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can add a password that will connect your users to a secure site. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=189842#p826416 See this forum post] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include role names in parameters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page. There are a number of defaults but you can add or change them here. Other display options are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizeable area below &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Display.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See Also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/X32dao-UENQ The Moodle URL Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Link/URL konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de l&#039;URL]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del recurso URL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=115196</id>
		<title>Lesson settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=115196"/>
		<updated>2014-10-08T14:10:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Progress bar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
=Lesson administration settings=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains the settings involved when first creating a lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
To add a lesson to your Moodle course page:&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your lesson, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu) and choose &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:addlessontitle.png|thumb|274px|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the lesson so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonappearance.png|thumb|404px|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===File pop===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to include a link to a file on the lesson page for students to refer to, upload it here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Progress bar===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to show a bar at the bottom of the page showing how far into the lesson the student has got.&lt;br /&gt;
* For lessons containing &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Content pages&#039;&#039;, once a lesson has been taken to the end, if that same lesson is re-taken, the progress bar will not be &amp;quot;reset&amp;quot;, i.e. it will show a 100% progress from page 1! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For lessons containing &#039;&#039;Question pages&#039;&#039; and set to &amp;quot;Re-take&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, the progress bar is always &amp;quot;reset&amp;quot; at 0% upon re-take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Note that the Lesson Progress bar only works correctly for lessons with a &amp;quot;straightforward&amp;quot; navigation, such as page 1 -&amp;gt; page  2 -&amp;gt; page n -&amp;gt; end of lesson. It is not guaranteed to work with pages &amp;quot;jumping all over the place&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display ongoing score===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to let students see their score as they work through the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display left menu=== &lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a list of the pages in the Lesson so a student can see what is coming up.&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum grade to display menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want the student to go through the lesson once and get a grade before they can (on review) see and navigate through all the different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow===&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that slideshow mode currently does not work for Moodle 2. There is a tracker issue and patch here MDL-36673&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the default number of answer boxes available when you add your question or content pages. For instance, if you are only going to use True/False, you would only need 2. You can change this at any time so it&#039;s not crucial.&lt;br /&gt;
===Use default feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a set phrase regardless of their answer. If you have set your own default feedback such as &amp;quot;well done; correct&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;never mind; better luck next time&amp;quot; etc it will appear. If you have not, then Moodle&#039;s default feedback will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link to next activity===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to give students a link to another activity when they reach the end of the lesson. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved using [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonavailability.png|thumb|470px|Availability settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Available from/Deadline===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a start and end date and time for your Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Time limit=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Timer.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set a time limit on the lesson. Students will see a countdown counter as they work. The timer does not stop them doing the lesson when the time is up, but  correct answers are no longer scored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password protected lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
*Change to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;  and enter the password if you want students only to access it when they know the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prerequisite lesson==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prereqlesson.png|thumb|460px|Prerequisite lesson settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dependent on===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows access to the lesson to be dependent on students&#039; performance in another lesson in the same course. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved with [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Time spent===&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here how long you want the student to have spent in the chosen previous lesson&lt;br /&gt;
===Completed===&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box if you want the student to have completed a previous lesson (according to [[Activity completion]] settings)&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade better than===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the grade  from the previous lesson which you want the student to have exceeded before they can attempt the current lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Flow control==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:flowcontrol.png|thumb|450px|Flow control settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
This puts a &amp;quot;Review Lesson&amp;quot; button on the last screen of the lesson to encourage the students to navigate through the lesson again from the start.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the students will not be able to &#039;&#039;change&#039;&#039; their answers, only &#039;&#039;view&#039;&#039; them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Provide option to try a question again===&lt;br /&gt;
*This displays a button after an incorrectly answered question so that the student can try again (but not get credit for it)&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Leave this off if you are using essay questions. &lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
*Decide here how many times you want students to be able to attempt each question. When they reach the maximum, they will be taken automatically to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after a Correct Answer===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here where you want a student to be sent to if they get a question right. See [[Using Lesson]] for more details on this setting. The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
**the next part of the Lesson (default setting)&lt;br /&gt;
**a random, unexpected page&lt;br /&gt;
**a random page which they have not yet answered.&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of pages to show===&lt;br /&gt;
You only need this if you have set &amp;quot;Action after a correct answer&amp;quot; to show an unseen or unanswered page. Otherwise, all pages will be seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessongrade.png|thumb|450px|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set a grade and grade category here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Practice lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this if you don&#039;t need the lesson to be scored/graded but just need students to work through some pages. Set this to Yes to have the same ungraded type Lesson in earlier versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom Scoring===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to give a particular number score (negative or positive) to each answer&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes allowed===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want your students to be able to do the lesson more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that this setting only applies to lessons containing &#039;&#039;Question pages&#039;&#039;. Lessons consisting &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;Content pages&#039;&#039; can be re-taken even if &#039;Re-takes allowed&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Handling of re-take====&lt;br /&gt;
If you allow your students to re-take the lesson, then decide here if the grade for all lesson attempts is the mean or the maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the Question Analysis always uses the answers from the first tries of the lesson. Re-takes by students are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum Number of Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Set here the minimum number of questions that will be used to calculate a student&#039;s score. Students will  be told how many they have answered and how many more they need to answer.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using Content pages, then set this to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you use this setting, then add some explanatory text at the start of the lesson so the student knows how many questions they must answer as a minimum. (They may answer more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Lesson&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The slideshow settings below do not work. See MDL-36673&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowwidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow background colour===&lt;br /&gt;
Background colour to for the slideshow if it is enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowbgcolor, Default #FFFFFF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediawidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window  height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show close button:===&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a close button as part of the popup generated for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaclose, Default No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of high scores displayed===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the number of high scores to display&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxhighscores, Default: 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Default maximum number of answers per page for site&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxanswers, Default: 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after correct answer===&lt;br /&gt;
The default action to take after a correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_defaultnextpage, Default: Normal - follow lesson path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/cUDV0WE5ZYY Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Mfj-8w-Ze0A Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jXjqHtgC9c0 Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier une leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:レッスンの設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de lección]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=115195</id>
		<title>Lesson settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=115195"/>
		<updated>2014-10-08T13:39:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Allow Student Review */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
=Lesson administration settings=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains the settings involved when first creating a lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
To add a lesson to your Moodle course page:&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your lesson, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu) and choose &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:addlessontitle.png|thumb|274px|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the lesson so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonappearance.png|thumb|404px|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===File pop===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to include a link to a file on the lesson page for students to refer to, upload it here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Progress bar===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to show a bar at the bottom of the page showing how far into the lesson the student has got.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display ongoing score===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to let students see their score as they work through the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display left menu=== &lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a list of the pages in the Lesson so a student can see what is coming up.&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum grade to display menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want the student to go through the lesson once and get a grade before they can (on review) see and navigate through all the different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow===&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that slideshow mode currently does not work for Moodle 2. There is a tracker issue and patch here MDL-36673&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the default number of answer boxes available when you add your question or content pages. For instance, if you are only going to use True/False, you would only need 2. You can change this at any time so it&#039;s not crucial.&lt;br /&gt;
===Use default feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a set phrase regardless of their answer. If you have set your own default feedback such as &amp;quot;well done; correct&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;never mind; better luck next time&amp;quot; etc it will appear. If you have not, then Moodle&#039;s default feedback will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link to next activity===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to give students a link to another activity when they reach the end of the lesson. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved using [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonavailability.png|thumb|470px|Availability settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Available from/Deadline===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a start and end date and time for your Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Time limit=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Timer.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set a time limit on the lesson. Students will see a countdown counter as they work. The timer does not stop them doing the lesson when the time is up, but  correct answers are no longer scored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password protected lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
*Change to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;  and enter the password if you want students only to access it when they know the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prerequisite lesson==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prereqlesson.png|thumb|460px|Prerequisite lesson settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dependent on===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows access to the lesson to be dependent on students&#039; performance in another lesson in the same course. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved with [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Time spent===&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here how long you want the student to have spent in the chosen previous lesson&lt;br /&gt;
===Completed===&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box if you want the student to have completed a previous lesson (according to [[Activity completion]] settings)&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade better than===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the grade  from the previous lesson which you want the student to have exceeded before they can attempt the current lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Flow control==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:flowcontrol.png|thumb|450px|Flow control settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
This puts a &amp;quot;Review Lesson&amp;quot; button on the last screen of the lesson to encourage the students to navigate through the lesson again from the start.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the students will not be able to &#039;&#039;change&#039;&#039; their answers, only &#039;&#039;view&#039;&#039; them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Provide option to try a question again===&lt;br /&gt;
*This displays a button after an incorrectly answered question so that the student can try again (but not get credit for it)&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Leave this off if you are using essay questions. &lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
*Decide here how many times you want students to be able to attempt each question. When they reach the maximum, they will be taken automatically to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after a Correct Answer===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here where you want a student to be sent to if they get a question right. See [[Using Lesson]] for more details on this setting. The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
**the next part of the Lesson (default setting)&lt;br /&gt;
**a random, unexpected page&lt;br /&gt;
**a random page which they have not yet answered.&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of pages to show===&lt;br /&gt;
You only need this if you have set &amp;quot;Action after a correct answer&amp;quot; to show an unseen or unanswered page. Otherwise, all pages will be seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessongrade.png|thumb|450px|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set a grade and grade category here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Practice lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this if you don&#039;t need the lesson to be scored/graded but just need students to work through some pages. Set this to Yes to have the same ungraded type Lesson in earlier versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom Scoring===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to give a particular number score (negative or positive) to each answer&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes allowed===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want your students to be able to do the lesson more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that this setting only applies to lessons containing &#039;&#039;Question pages&#039;&#039;. Lessons consisting &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;Content pages&#039;&#039; can be re-taken even if &#039;Re-takes allowed&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Handling of re-take====&lt;br /&gt;
If you allow your students to re-take the lesson, then decide here if the grade for all lesson attempts is the mean or the maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the Question Analysis always uses the answers from the first tries of the lesson. Re-takes by students are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum Number of Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Set here the minimum number of questions that will be used to calculate a student&#039;s score. Students will  be told how many they have answered and how many more they need to answer.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using Content pages, then set this to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you use this setting, then add some explanatory text at the start of the lesson so the student knows how many questions they must answer as a minimum. (They may answer more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Lesson&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The slideshow settings below do not work. See MDL-36673&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowwidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow background colour===&lt;br /&gt;
Background colour to for the slideshow if it is enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowbgcolor, Default #FFFFFF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediawidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window  height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show close button:===&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a close button as part of the popup generated for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaclose, Default No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of high scores displayed===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the number of high scores to display&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxhighscores, Default: 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Default maximum number of answers per page for site&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxanswers, Default: 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after correct answer===&lt;br /&gt;
The default action to take after a correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_defaultnextpage, Default: Normal - follow lesson path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/cUDV0WE5ZYY Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Mfj-8w-Ze0A Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jXjqHtgC9c0 Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier une leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:レッスンの設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de lección]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=115194</id>
		<title>Lesson settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=115194"/>
		<updated>2014-10-08T13:20:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Re-takes allowed */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
=Lesson administration settings=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains the settings involved when first creating a lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
To add a lesson to your Moodle course page:&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your lesson, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu) and choose &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:addlessontitle.png|thumb|274px|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the lesson so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonappearance.png|thumb|404px|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===File pop===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to include a link to a file on the lesson page for students to refer to, upload it here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Progress bar===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to show a bar at the bottom of the page showing how far into the lesson the student has got.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display ongoing score===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to let students see their score as they work through the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display left menu=== &lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a list of the pages in the Lesson so a student can see what is coming up.&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum grade to display menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want the student to go through the lesson once and get a grade before they can (on review) see and navigate through all the different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow===&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that slideshow mode currently does not work for Moodle 2. There is a tracker issue and patch here MDL-36673&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the default number of answer boxes available when you add your question or content pages. For instance, if you are only going to use True/False, you would only need 2. You can change this at any time so it&#039;s not crucial.&lt;br /&gt;
===Use default feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a set phrase regardless of their answer. If you have set your own default feedback such as &amp;quot;well done; correct&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;never mind; better luck next time&amp;quot; etc it will appear. If you have not, then Moodle&#039;s default feedback will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link to next activity===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to give students a link to another activity when they reach the end of the lesson. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved using [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonavailability.png|thumb|470px|Availability settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Available from/Deadline===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a start and end date and time for your Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Time limit=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Timer.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set a time limit on the lesson. Students will see a countdown counter as they work. The timer does not stop them doing the lesson when the time is up, but  correct answers are no longer scored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password protected lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
*Change to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;  and enter the password if you want students only to access it when they know the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prerequisite lesson==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prereqlesson.png|thumb|460px|Prerequisite lesson settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dependent on===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows access to the lesson to be dependent on students&#039; performance in another lesson in the same course. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved with [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Time spent===&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here how long you want the student to have spent in the chosen previous lesson&lt;br /&gt;
===Completed===&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box if you want the student to have completed a previous lesson (according to [[Activity completion]] settings)&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade better than===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the grade  from the previous lesson which you want the student to have exceeded before they can attempt the current lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Flow control==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:flowcontrol.png|thumb|450px|Flow control settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
This puts a &amp;quot;Review Lesson&amp;quot; button on the last screen of the lesson to encourage the student to navigate through the lesson again from the start.  Be sure to check other settings to allow them to change their answers.&lt;br /&gt;
===Provide option to try a question again===&lt;br /&gt;
*This displays a button after an incorrectly answered question so that the student can try again (but not get credit for it)&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Leave this off if you are using essay questions. &lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
*Decide here how many times you want students to be able to attempt each question. When they reach the maximum, they will be taken automatically to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after a Correct Answer===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here where you want a student to be sent to if they get a question right. See [[Using Lesson]] for more details on this setting. The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
**the next part of the Lesson (default setting)&lt;br /&gt;
**a random, unexpected page&lt;br /&gt;
**a random page which they have not yet answered.&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of pages to show===&lt;br /&gt;
You only need this if you have set &amp;quot;Action after a correct answer&amp;quot; to show an unseen or unanswered page. Otherwise, all pages will be seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessongrade.png|thumb|450px|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set a grade and grade category here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Practice lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this if you don&#039;t need the lesson to be scored/graded but just need students to work through some pages. Set this to Yes to have the same ungraded type Lesson in earlier versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom Scoring===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to give a particular number score (negative or positive) to each answer&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes allowed===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want your students to be able to do the lesson more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that this setting only applies to lessons containing &#039;&#039;Question pages&#039;&#039;. Lessons consisting &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;Content pages&#039;&#039; can be re-taken even if &#039;Re-takes allowed&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Handling of re-take====&lt;br /&gt;
If you allow your students to re-take the lesson, then decide here if the grade for all lesson attempts is the mean or the maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the Question Analysis always uses the answers from the first tries of the lesson. Re-takes by students are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum Number of Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Set here the minimum number of questions that will be used to calculate a student&#039;s score. Students will  be told how many they have answered and how many more they need to answer.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using Content pages, then set this to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you use this setting, then add some explanatory text at the start of the lesson so the student knows how many questions they must answer as a minimum. (They may answer more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Lesson&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The slideshow settings below do not work. See MDL-36673&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowwidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow background colour===&lt;br /&gt;
Background colour to for the slideshow if it is enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowbgcolor, Default #FFFFFF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediawidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window  height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show close button:===&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a close button as part of the popup generated for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaclose, Default No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of high scores displayed===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the number of high scores to display&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxhighscores, Default: 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Default maximum number of answers per page for site&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxanswers, Default: 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after correct answer===&lt;br /&gt;
The default action to take after a correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_defaultnextpage, Default: Normal - follow lesson path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/cUDV0WE5ZYY Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Mfj-8w-Ze0A Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jXjqHtgC9c0 Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier une leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:レッスンの設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de lección]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_module&amp;diff=112625</id>
		<title>Questionnaire module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_module&amp;diff=112625"/>
		<updated>2014-05-14T21:07:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;Questionnaire module&#039;&#039;&#039; is a survey-like type of activity.  It is a contributed module which can be downloaded from the [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_questionnaire Moodle Plugins Directory]. It allows teachers to create a wide range of questions to get student feedback e.g. on a course or activities. The goals of the Questionnaire module are quite different from those of the Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; modules. With Questionnaire you do not test or assess the student, you &#039;&#039;gather data&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Summary of features==&lt;br /&gt;
Please look at the [[Adding/editing a questionnaire]] and [[Editing Questionnaire questions|Adding Questions]] pages for more information.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Check Boxes&lt;br /&gt;
*Date Box&lt;br /&gt;
*Dropdown choices&lt;br /&gt;
*Essay box - HTML editor possible, set width and height of box&lt;br /&gt;
*Numeric - can set length and number of decimal places&lt;br /&gt;
*Radio buttons - have labels you determine for each question&lt;br /&gt;
*Scale - can customize in many ways&lt;br /&gt;
*Text box&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes/no&lt;br /&gt;
You can also place:&lt;br /&gt;
*Page breaks &lt;br /&gt;
*Labels - might be used to give an overview of next set of questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of reports===&lt;br /&gt;
*Responses can be viewed by everyone or select group&lt;br /&gt;
*Responses can be exported&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* The Questionnaire plugin can be downloaded from the [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_questionnaire Moodle Plugins Directory].&lt;br /&gt;
*Discussions: please create or find a discussion topic in the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=469  Questionnaire Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Statistical_survey Statistical_survey] From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 2.8&#039;&#039;&#039; will hopefully have a new module that combines the best of Questionnaire, Feedback and Survey into an upgrade for the Survey module. See [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Development:Survey_2_brainstorm Development: Survey 2 brainstorm]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo cuestionario]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questionnaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=112094</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=112094"/>
		<updated>2014-04-23T09:37:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = &lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing add-ons]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to SHORTANSWER or MULTICHOICE questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your course&#039;s front page and go into Edit mode and click on the Configuration icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the dropdown list to select the glossary that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select only one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave the dropdown list on the Choose... position.&lt;br /&gt;
# Maximum number of entries to export. Leave empty to export all entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Glossary entries can be exported to the Quiz Questions bank either as multiple choice or short answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
## Multiple choice questions will consist of the following elements:&lt;br /&gt;
### question text = glossary entry definition&lt;br /&gt;
### correct answer = glossary entry concept&lt;br /&gt;
### distracters = 3 glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
### You have a choice of 4 types of numbering for the exported multiple choice questions:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; a. b. c. (the default numbering type)&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A. B. C. D.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;1. 2. 3.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;no numbering&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##Short answer questions&lt;br /&gt;
### Case insensitive. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (uppercase or lowercase).&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
### Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When done, click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the [Export n entries] link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; (e.g.) Demo -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export entries to file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its name is e.g. Demo_Glossary.xml.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go back to the course&#039;s homepage. You see that the the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;File format : Moodle XML format&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Category Default&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Get category from file (check it)&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Import from file upload...&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer in step A 10 (Demo_Glossary.xml. and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported (of the SHORTANSWER type).&lt;br /&gt;
# You can use the SHORTANSWER or the MULTICHOICE questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the SHORTANSWER questions to create one or more Random Short-Answer MATCHING questions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=112093</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=112093"/>
		<updated>2014-04-23T09:27:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Import to the quiz questions bank */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = &lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the &#039;&#039;Glossary export to quiz&#039;&#039; installation file and unzip it to the &#039;&#039;&#039;\blocks&#039;&#039;&#039; directory in your Moodle folder.&lt;br /&gt;
# Be sure that the final name of the directory is: glossary_export_to_quiz, the full path in your Moodle installation will be blocks/glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
# Login to Moodle as Administrator and click Notifications under Site Administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to SHORTANSWER or MULTICHOICE questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your course&#039;s front page and go into Edit mode and click on the Configuration icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the dropdown list to select the glossary that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select only one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave the dropdown list on the Choose... position.&lt;br /&gt;
# Maximum number of entries to export. Leave empty to export all entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Glossary entries can be exported to the Quiz Questions bank either as multiple choice or short answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
## Multiple choice questions will consist of the following elements:&lt;br /&gt;
### question text = glossary entry definition&lt;br /&gt;
### correct answer = glossary entry concept&lt;br /&gt;
### distracters = 3 glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
### You have a choice of 4 types of numbering for the exported multiple choice questions:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; a. b. c. (the default numbering type)&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A. B. C. D.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;1. 2. 3.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;no numbering&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##Short answer questions&lt;br /&gt;
### Case insensitive. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (uppercase or lowercase).&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
### Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When done, click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the [Export n entries] link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; (e.g.) Demo -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export entries to file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its name is e.g. Demo_Glossary.xml.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go back to the course&#039;s homepage. You see that the the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;File format : Moodle XML format&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Category Default&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Get category from file (check it)&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Import from file upload...&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer in step A 10 (Demo_Glossary.xml. and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported (of the SHORTANSWER type).&lt;br /&gt;
# You can use the SHORTANSWER or the MULTICHOICE questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the SHORTANSWER questions to create one or more Random Short-Answer MATCHING questions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type&amp;diff=112013</id>
		<title>Regular Expression Short-Answer question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type&amp;diff=112013"/>
		<updated>2014-04-21T12:58:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Inserting RegExp sub-questions in Cloze type questions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===The RegExp Short Answer Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** The RegExp Short Answer question described in this documentation page is a 3rd-party plugin, which allows you to create questions for the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; activity. It is &#039;&#039;different&#039;&#039; from the &amp;quot;Use regular expressions&amp;quot; option in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
** The documentation for the &amp;quot;Use regular expressions&amp;quot; option in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; module is to be found at: [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Short_answer_analysis Short answer analysis].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Short Answer question, the RegExp Short Answer question expects the respondent to answer an &amp;quot;open&amp;quot; question with a word or a short phrase. However, the RegExp system system gives you access to a more powerful system for &#039;&#039;analyzing the student&#039;s answers&#039;&#039; with the aim of &#039;&#039;providing more relevant immediate feedback&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Correct answer matching a regular expression pattern===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to give complete examples of the vast possibilities offered by this system, and the following are just some possibilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 1.&#039;&#039;&#039;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose your question was &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;. In the Answer 1 box you would type the &amp;quot;best&amp;quot; answer, e.g. &amp;quot;it&#039;s blue, white and red&amp;quot;. For more details, see [[#firstcorrect|First correct answer]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Answer 2 box you would type this regular expression: &amp;quot;it&#039;s blue, white(,| and) red&amp;quot; (quotes should not be typed, of course).&lt;br /&gt;
* If [[#casesensivity|Case sensivity]] is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, this will match any of those 4 responses:&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
    It&#039;s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
    It&#039;s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question: &amp;quot;What are blue, red and yellow?&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 1: &amp;quot;they are colours&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 2: &amp;quot;(|they(&#039;| a)re )colou?rs&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* This will match any of those 6 responses:&lt;br /&gt;
    colours&lt;br /&gt;
    colors&lt;br /&gt;
    they&#039;re colours&lt;br /&gt;
    they&#039;re colors&lt;br /&gt;
    they are colours&lt;br /&gt;
    they are colors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- The beginning of this regular expression &amp;quot;(|they(&#039;| a)re )&amp;quot; will match either nothing or &amp;quot;they&#039;re &amp;quot; or &amp;quot;they are &amp;quot;. In &amp;quot;colou?r&amp;quot;, the question-mark means: the preceding character (or parenthesized group of characters) zero or one time; it is used here to match British English as well as US spelling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3.&#039;&#039;&#039;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name consists of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel &#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 1: &amp;quot;cat&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 2: &amp;quot;[bcr]at&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* This will match: bat, cat or rat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- In Regular Expression syntax, the inclusion of characters between square brackets means than ANY of those characters can be used. So, in the above example, the regular expression &amp;quot;[bcr]at&amp;quot; is the exact equivalent of &amp;quot;(b|c|r)at&amp;quot;. Be careful NOT to include the pipe character as separator in your [...] regular expressions. For instance, &amp;quot;[b|c|r]at&amp;quot; will NOT WORK CORRECTLY.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4.&#039;&#039;&#039;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;permutation&#039; feature (introduced in regexp version &#039;&#039;&#039;2012102900&#039;&#039;&#039; for Moodle 2.3+)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question: &amp;quot;What are the colours of the French flag (in any order)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 1: &amp;quot;it&#039;s blue, white and red&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 2: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;it&#039;s [[_blue_, _white_(,| and) _red_]]&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Upon saving the question, Answer 2 will be automatically re-written as Answer 2b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
it&#039;s (blue, white(,| and) red|blue, red(,| and) white|white, red(,| and) blue|white, blue(,| and) red|red, blue(,| and) white|red, white(,| and) blue) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it will match all the following answers:&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s blue, red, white&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s blue, red and white&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s white, red, blue&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s white, red and blue&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s white, blue, red&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s white, blue and red&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s red, blue, white&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s red, blue and white&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s red, white, blue&lt;br /&gt;
    it&#039;s red, white and blue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- This &#039;permutation feature&#039; has been asked quite a few times by regexp users. It is definitely &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; possible to obtain it by using standard Regular Expressions syntax. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible (but tedious) to write a regular expression including all the possible permutations - as in Answer 2b above - but the &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; syntax I am offering makes it easier to write... provided you strictly adhere to that syntax!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Include within double square brackets the part of the Answer which will contain &#039;permutable&#039; words or phrases. You are actually allowed to have a maximum of 2 such sets of &#039;permutable&#039; words or phrases. But you cannot embed one set within another!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, use pairs of underscores (the _ character) to delimit each &#039;permutable&#039; word or phrase. You can still use any of the accepted Regular Expressions characters, as explained here, in your Answers which contain one (or two) such sets of &#039;permutable&#039; words or phrases. If your Answer does not contain an even number of underscores, an Error warning will be displayed upon clicking the Show Alternate Answers button or when trying to Save your question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 5.&#039;&#039;&#039;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another &#039;permutation&#039; example&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question: &amp;quot;Quote the English proverb that is an encouragement to hard, diligent work.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 1: &amp;quot;Early to bed and early to rise makes an ma healthy, wealthy and wise&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer 2: &amp;quot;Early to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[_bed_ and early to _rise_]], makes a man [[_healthy_, _wealthy_ and _wise_]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon saving the question, Answer 2 will be automatically re-written as Answer 2b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Early to (bed and early to rise|rise and early to bed) makes a man (healthy, wealthy and wise|healthy, wise and wealthy|wealthy, wise and healthy|wealthy, healthy and wise|wise, healthy and wealthy|wise, wealthy and healthy)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it will match all the following answers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wise and wealthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to bed and early to rise makes a man wealthy, wise and healthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to bed and early to rise makes a man wealthy, healthy and wise&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to bed and early to rise makes a man wise, healthy and wealthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to bed and early to rise makes a man wise, wealthy and healthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to rise and early to bed makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to rise and early to bed makes a man healthy, wise and wealthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to rise and early to bed makes a man wealthy, wise and healthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to rise and early to bed makes a man wealthy, healthy and wise&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to rise and early to bed makes a man wise, healthy and wealthy&lt;br /&gt;
    Early to rise and early to bed makes a man wise, wealthy and healthy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Escaping metacharacters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Definition====&lt;br /&gt;
In the Regular Expressions syntax, a number of special characters or &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039; have special functions; but it is possible to force these special characters to be interpreted as normal (or &#039;&#039;literal&#039;&#039;) characters by preceding them with a so-called &#039;&#039;escape&#039;&#039; character, the backslash &amp;quot;\&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
Below is a (partial) list of those &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;. ^ $ * ( ) [ ] + ? | { } \ /&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====In Accepted Answers====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Accepted Answers&#039;&#039;&#039; are Answers which have a grade greater than zero, i.e. are &#039;&#039;totally&#039;&#039; (grade = 100%) or &#039;&#039;partially&#039;&#039; (grade &amp;gt; 0% &amp;lt; 100%) &#039;&#039;correct Answers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In those Answers, if you need to use one or more &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039; for their &#039;&#039;literal&#039;&#039; value, you &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;escape&#039;&#039; them (i.e. precede them with a backslash). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 1.-&#039;&#039;&#039; If you want to accept the answer &amp;quot;This computer costs 1000$ in the US.&amp;quot;, you must write the Answer as &amp;quot;This computer costs 1000\$ in the US\.&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 2.-&#039;&#039;&#039; If you want to accept the answer &amp;quot;Desktop computers are (usually) more powerful than laptops.&amp;quot;, you must write the Answer as &amp;quot;Desktop computers are \(usually\) more powerful than laptops\.&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can mix metacharacters that have a special function with others that have a literal value, within one Answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3.-&#039;&#039;&#039; If you want to accept both answers &amp;quot;Computers are (usually) cheaper than cars.&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Computers are (usually) less expensive than cars.&amp;quot;, you must write the Answer as &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Computers are \(usually\) (cheaper|less expensive) than cars.&amp;quot;&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Accepted Answers&#039;&#039;&#039; boxes you can only enter regular expressions which can generate a finite number of sentences. That is why you will not be allowed to use some &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039; which match a potentially infinite number of sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
* List of &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039; which you &#039;&#039;&#039;can&#039;&#039;&#039; use for their RegExp functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;( ) [ ] ? |&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* List of &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039; which you &#039;&#039;&#039;cannot&#039;&#039;&#039; use for their RegExp functions, and can only be used for their &#039;&#039;literal&#039;&#039; value (and must be &#039;&#039;escaped&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;. ^ $ * + { } \ /&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The question mark (?) can be used either for its RegExp function OR, if escaped, for its &#039;&#039;literal&#039;&#039; value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4.-&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Do you like Jack(ie)?\?&amp;quot; will accept both &amp;quot;Do you like Jack?&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Do you like Jackie?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====In Incorrect Answers====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Incorrect Answers&#039;&#039;&#039; are Answers which have a grade equal to zero (or None).&lt;br /&gt;
When you write those Incorrect Answers, you can use the whole range of &#039;&#039;meta characters&#039;&#039; for their special function value:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;. ^ $ * ( ) [ ] + ? | { } \ /&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For examples of use, see &#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting missing required words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039; below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Answers Validation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you validate your Question, the question engine checks the validity of your expression, according to the features explained above. If an error is found, an ERROR message is displayed above the erroneous Answer(s) and you cannot save the Question until that error has been corrected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The validation system also checks that your parentheses and square brackets are correctly balanced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; The faulty Answer text is &amp;quot;underlined&amp;quot; with the list of errors, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Errors_en.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Detecting missing required words or character strings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a powerful feature of the RegExp question type. It will analyse the student&#039;s answer for words that are required for the answer to be correct. There are 2 ways to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use what is called &amp;quot;negative lookahead assertion&amp;quot; in regular expressions syntax: &#039;&#039;&#039;^(?!.*required.*)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* or use an &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; pseudo-syntax provided in RegExp (an initial double hyphen): &#039;&#039;&#039;--.*required.*&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
In the examples below, we shall be using the &#039;ad hoc&#039; RegExp pseudo-syntax, and sometimes give the &amp;quot;negative lookahead assertion&amp;quot; equivalent for anyone interested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Teacher Answer which begins with a double hyphen will analyse the student’s response to find out whether the following string is present or absent. If present, the analysis continues to the next question; if absent, the analysis stops and the relevant feedback message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4. &#039;&#039;&#039; Question &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teacher Answer 2: --.*blue.*&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response: &amp;quot;it&#039;s red and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback 2: The color of the sky is missing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the . (dot) stands for “any character” and the * (asterisk) means “preceding special character repeated any number of times”. The Teacher Answer 2 regular expression above means: check whether the character string &amp;quot;blue&amp;quot;, preceded with anything and followed by anything is absent from the student&#039;s answer. Please note that the use of the asterisk is different in Moodle&#039;s &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; Short Answer question type and in the RegExp question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, this syntax is not sufficient to track the absence of the word &amp;quot;blue&amp;quot; in a student&#039;s answer such as &amp;quot;it&#039;s blueish, white and red&amp;quot;. To make sure that we want to track the absence of &amp;quot;blue&amp;quot; as a word(and not just as part of a word), we must use the metacharacter \b which is an anchor which matches at a position that is called a &amp;quot;word boundary&amp;quot;. Hence the new version of our Example 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4b. &#039;&#039;&#039; Question &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teacher Answer 2: --.*\bblue\b.*&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response: &amp;quot;it&#039;s blueish, white and red&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback 2: The color of the sky is missing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Using the &amp;quot;negative lookahead assertion&amp;quot; syntax mentioned at the beginning of this section, Teacher Answer 2 would look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
* Teacher Answer 2: &#039;&#039;&#039;^(?!&#039;&#039;&#039;.*\blue\b.*&#039;&#039;&#039;)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Question: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name consists of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel &#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* Teacher Answer: &amp;quot;--^[bcr]&amp;quot;. &#039;&#039;&#039;OR&#039;&#039;&#039; * Teacher Answer: &amp;quot;--^(b|c|r)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response: &amp;quot;dog&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback: &amp;quot;Your answer should start with one of these letters: b, c or r&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In regular expressions syntax, the caret ^ stands for &amp;quot;beginning of character string to be matched&amp;quot;, while the dollar sign $ stands for &amp;quot;end of character string&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Question &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teacher Answer: &amp;quot;--.*(blue|red|white).*&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response #1: &amp;quot;It&#039;s black and orange.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback: &amp;quot;You have not even found one of the colors of the French flag!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response #2: &amp;quot;It&#039;s blue and orange.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback: None, the analysis continues to the next Teacher Answer expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- The regular expression looks for a missing word among those listed between brackets and separated by the | sign. As soon as one of those words is found, the &amp;quot;missing condition&amp;quot; is considered false, and the response analysis continues to the next Answer&#039;s regular expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Using the &amp;quot;negative lookahead assertion&amp;quot; syntax, Teacher Answer would look like this: &#039;&#039;&#039;^(?!.*(blue|red|white).*)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 7.&#039;&#039;&#039; Question &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teacher Answer: &amp;quot;--.*(&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;&#039;&#039;&#039;blue&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;&#039;&#039;&#039;red&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;&amp;amp;&#039;&#039;&#039;white).*&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response #1: &amp;quot;It&#039;s blue and orange.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback: &amp;quot;You have not found all the colors of the French flag&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Sample student Response #2: &amp;quot;white blue red&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback: None, the analysis continues to the next Teacher Answer expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- The regular expression looks for a missing word among all of those listed between brackets and separated by the &amp;amp;&amp;amp; double character combination. Only if all of those words are present, will the &amp;quot;missing condition&amp;quot; be considered false, and the response analysis continue to the next Answer&#039;s regular expression. Please note that the list of parenthesized words must begin with the &amp;amp;&amp;amp; character sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Using the &amp;quot;negative lookahead assertion&amp;quot; syntax, Teacher Answer would look like this: &#039;&#039;&#039;(^(?!.*(blue).*)|^(?!.*(white).*)|^(?!.*(red).*))&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing a regular expression question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:settings01.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Help Button Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a mode other than &#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039; will display a button to enable the student to get the next letter or word (including the very first letter or word).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Adaptive mode&#039;&#039; the button displayed will say &amp;quot;Buy next letter&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Buy next word&amp;quot; according to the mode selected by the teacher. For setting the &amp;quot;cost&amp;quot; of buying a letter or word, see the &#039;&#039;Penalty for incorrect tries and Buying a letter or word&#039;&#039; settings further down the Edit form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Adaptive No penalty&#039;&#039; mode the button displayed will say &amp;quot;Get next letter&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Get next word&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the Help button mode value is set at &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Help button will only be available to quizzes that have their &#039;&#039;&#039;Question behaviour&#039;&#039;&#039; mode set to &#039;&#039;Adaptive&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Adaptive (no penalties)&#039;&#039; as it does not make sense to enable the Help button for non-adaptive tests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;casesensivity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Case sensitivity&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editing form features a &#039;&#039;Case sensitivity&#039;&#039; setting, which is valid for &#039;&#039;all of the answers&#039;&#039; of the current question. You should not add an &#039;&#039;&#039;/i&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter at the end of your regular expressions. You may need to edit questions authored in 1.9 when you upgrade to 2.0 and remove any &#039;&#039;&#039;/i&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters from your regular expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show alternate answers to student====&lt;br /&gt;
Show all correct alternative answers to student when on review page? If there are a lot of automatically generated correct alternative answers, displaying them all can make the review page quite long. So, you may wish to &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; display all those alternative correct answers. The first correct answer will always be displayed, under the label &amp;quot;The best correct answer is:&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;firstcorrect&amp;quot;&amp;gt;First correct answer&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Answer 1 you must enter an answer text which a) is the &amp;quot;best&amp;quot; possible answer; b) is &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; a regular expression or - more exactly - &#039;&#039;will not be interpreted as a regular expression&#039;&#039; but &amp;quot;as is&amp;quot; and c) has a Grade value of 100%. You will notice that when you create a new RegExp question the Grade value for Answer 1 is already automatically set at 100% and cannot be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note.- There are two ways to enter an answer containing meta characters, according to whether this is Answer 1 or any of the subsequent Answers. Exemple question: how much did your computer cost?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answer 1: It cost $1,000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answer 2: It cost ( me)?\$1,000\.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Anwer 1 you just type the expected answer &amp;quot;as is&amp;quot;. The text in Answer 2 will be interpreted as a regular expression, and thus you need to escape the two meta characters (the $ sign and the end-of-sentence full stop). Note that here I have added the optional pronoun &amp;quot;me&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Other answers====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any answers with a Grade higher than 0% must be entered as valid regular expressions &#039;&#039;which can yield acceptable alternative answers&#039;&#039; (regardless of the Grade being less than 100%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you cannot enter the following Answer with a grade greater than zero:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.*blue, white(,| and) red.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason is that this expression would accept as correct (with a non-null grade) an infinity of answers, many of which would be incorrect, e.g.: &amp;quot;My hat it blue, white, red and orange&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;The French flag is blue, white, red, black and nice&amp;quot; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to do so, validation of your question will fail and an error message will be displayed to tell you where you went wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means that some regular expressions, which are perfectly valid and would correctly analyse the student&#039;s (correct) answer are not recommended. The only case where they would work is a) if your question&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Hint Button&#039;&#039;&#039; is set at No and b) your quiz &#039;&#039;&#039;Adaptative Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; is set at No. This means that you must &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; enter as an answer with a grade higher than 0% a regular expression beginning with a double hyphen &amp;quot;--&amp;quot;, used for detecting missing character strings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show/Hide alternate answers====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are creating (or modifying) a RegExp question, you may want to make sure that all the alternative correct answers that you have created in the Answers fields will work. You can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Show alternate answers&#039;&#039;&#039; button to calculate and display all the correct answers in the form you are editing. This may take quite some time on your server, depending on the number and complexity of the regular expressions you have entered in the Answer fields!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the other hand, it is the recommended way to check that your &amp;quot;correct answers&amp;quot; expressions are correctly written. Here is an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please remember that only Answers regular expressions with a score greater than zero will be used to calculate those alternative answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Show alternate answers&#039;&#039;&#039; button will perform an analysis of all the regular expressions you entered in the Answers field. If a syntax error is detected at this stage, the alternative correct answers will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; be displayed, and an &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error message will displayed above the faulty regular expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:showhidealternateanswers.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Previewing questions in popup window (teacher only)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the teacher previews a question in the popup preview question window they can display all of the acceptable alternative answers. Those alternative answers are automatically generated from the regular expressions you have entered when creating the question which carry a grade higher than 0%. The very first acceptable answer is printed as is at the top of the list. This is followed by all the other alternative acceptable answers, consisting of a) the Grade attributed; b) a reminder of the regular expression you entered and c) a list of all alternative answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:alternate_answers.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Automatic formatted extra feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the RegExp question can be used in any &#039;&#039;&#039;Question behaviour&#039;&#039;&#039; mode. However, it is advised to create quizzes containing only RegExp questions or containing other types of questions, but &#039;&#039;preferably&#039;&#039; if the quiz&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question behaviour / How questions behave&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting is set to &#039;&#039;Adaptive mode&#039;&#039; (with or without penalty).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a student (or teacher in Preview Question mode) submits a response to a RegExp question, 3 types of feedback messages are displayed (in Adaptive mode).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* (line 3) The standard correct/incorrect Quiz message (plus the color associated with either state).&lt;br /&gt;
* (line 2) The Feedback message entered by the question creator for each Teacher Answer.&lt;br /&gt;
* (line 1) An extra feedback system is automatically provided, displaying the student&#039;s submitted response, with the following format codes:&lt;br /&gt;
** the beginning of the student&#039;s submitted response which best matches one of the Alternate Answers is displayed in blue;&lt;br /&gt;
** any words from the submitted response which are present in the potential Alternate Answers following the initial correct part submitted are colored in red;&lt;br /&gt;
** any words not present in the potential Alternate Answers following the initial correct part submitted are colored in red and formatted as strike-through.&lt;br /&gt;
The meaning of those colors etc. may need to be explained to the student before they take the quiz, especially the difference between &amp;quot;red&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;red plus strike-through&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:regexp_colored_feedback_21.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback given by the Help button===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a student clicks the &#039;&#039;&#039;Buy/Get next letter/word&#039;&#039;&#039; button to buy/get a letter/word, that letter or word is added to his response. The last line of the feedback zone shows the following information: added letter/word; penalty cost (if applicable); total penalties so far (if applicable). Note that if the total of penalties exceeds 1 (i.e. 100%), that total is displayed in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the teacher views the quiz results, on the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Review Attempt&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; pages, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;History of responses&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; section, the response history shows &#039;&#039;Submit (with a request for help)&#039;&#039; with the response states before and after the letter/word was added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:21-addedletterhistory.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:21-addedwordhistory.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
If the student clicked the &#039;&#039;&#039;Buy/Get next word&#039;&#039;&#039; button while his current submitted answer contained the beginning of a (correct) word, the full correct word is displayed in the Answer field, and the feedback message says &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Completed&#039;&#039; word&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Added&#039;&#039; word&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:21-completedwordhistory.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display right answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Quiz settings &#039;&#039;Review options&#039;&#039; are set to display the Right answer (During the attempt or Immediately after the attempt etc.), and your question&#039;s &#039;&#039;Show alternate answers to student&#039;&#039; setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, when the student has submitted his attempt, and is reviewing his answers, all of the possible answers will be displayed, as shown in this screenshot. Correct responses with a grade &amp;lt; 100% are also listed, with their grade value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the &#039;&#039;teacher&#039;&#039; will always be able to see that &amp;quot;other accepted answers&amp;quot; section when reviewing the Quiz answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:23 correct responses.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inserting RegExp sub-questions in Cloze type questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Important notice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
The RegExp question type is &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; recognized by the standard Moodle Cloze question type. If you want to use it you&#039;ll have to replace 2 files (&#039;&#039;renderer.php&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;questiontype.php&#039;&#039;) on your &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;yourmoodle&amp;gt;/question/type/multianswer&#039;&#039; with the hacked files available from the links below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://raw.github.com/rezeau/moodle/multianswer_regexp-26/question/type/multianswer/questiontype.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://raw.github.com/rezeau/moodle/multianswer_regexp-26/question/type/multianswer/renderer.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note.- If you are interested in comparing the 2 &amp;quot;standard&amp;quot; Moodle 2.6 multianswer files with the &amp;quot;RegExp hacked&amp;quot; files, go to &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://github.com/rezeau/moodle/compare/MOODLE_26_STABLE...multianswer_regexp-26&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Syntax for inserting RegExp sub-questions in Cloze type questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;REGEXP&#039;&#039;&#039; or shorter &#039;&#039;&#039;RX&#039;&#039;&#039; coding for questions which ignore case&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The colors of the French flag are {:REGEXP:=blue, white and red#Correct!}.&lt;br /&gt;
* The colors of the French flag are {:RX:=blue, white and red#Correct!}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Will accept &amp;quot;blue, white and red&amp;quot; as a correct answer as well as &amp;quot;Blue, White and Red&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
use &#039;&#039;&#039;REGEXP_C&#039;&#039;&#039; or shorter &#039;&#039;&#039;RXC&#039;&#039;&#039; coding for questions in which case matters&lt;br /&gt;
* The colors of the French flag are {:REGEXP_C:=blue, white and red#Correct!}.&lt;br /&gt;
* The colors of the French flag are {:RXC:=blue, white and red#Correct!}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Will not accept &amp;quot;Blue, White and Red&amp;quot; as a correct answer (wrong capital letters).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that, as explained above, the very first answer &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; be Graded 100% (in Cloze type question syntax, all correct is either &#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;100%&#039;&#039;&#039;) and it must &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; be a regular expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the syntax of the sub-questions inside a Cloze-type question must be followed exactly and that you must never ever copy and paste any question text from e.g. a word-processor into the Cloze-type question editing window. Quite often Cloze-type questions yield errors because extraneous blank spaces, new lines, or any odd formatting character has made its way into the question text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the &#039;&#039;Hint&#039;&#039; button is not available for a RegExp question embedded in a Cloze-type question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
====Downloads====&lt;br /&gt;
* Download [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_regexp the Regexp question type] from the Moodle Plugins repository.&lt;br /&gt;
* IMPORTANT : Starting with the 2.2 version of REGEXP, if you want the Help feature, you must also download and install the following 2 &amp;quot;question behaviours&amp;quot; from the Moodle Plugins repository: [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qbehaviour_regexpadaptivewithhelp RegExp Adaptive mode with Help]  and [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qbehaviour_regexpadaptivewithhelpnopenalty RegExp Adaptive mode with Help (no penalties)].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Installation====&lt;br /&gt;
-------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
If you have downloaded the zip archive from the new moodle.org plugins page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.- Unzip the zip archive to your local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.- This will give you a folder named &amp;quot;regexp&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- GO TO STEP 4 below&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have downloaded the zip archive from https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_regexp (&#039;&#039;&#039;for latest developments&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.- Unzip the zip archive to your local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.- This will give you a folder named something like &amp;quot;rezeau-moodle_qtype_regexp-ff8c6a1&amp;quot;. The end of the name may vary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- ***Rename*** that folder to &amp;quot;regexp&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Upload the regexp folder to &amp;lt;yourmoodle&amp;gt;/question/type/ folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.- Visit your Admin/Notifications page so that the new question type gets installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Learn more about regular expressions====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.regular-expressions.info/tutorial.html Regular Expressions Tutorial] A complete introduction to the topic.&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.regexplanet.com/simple/index.html Regular Expression Test Page] Test your regular expressions on a variety of &amp;quot;answers&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Other Moodle question types based on regular expressions====&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/dev/The_OU_PMatch_algorithm The OUP&#039;s PMatch]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/20/en/Preg_question_type Oleg Sychev&#039;s Preg question type]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:question/type/regexp]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta respuesta corta de expresión regular]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Viewing_Questionnaire_responses&amp;diff=111678</id>
		<title>Viewing Questionnaire responses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Viewing_Questionnaire_responses&amp;diff=111678"/>
		<updated>2014-04-10T07:20:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* The CSV file (how to use it) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== All responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Questionnaire Report page, users with the necessary permissions can view a statistical Summary of all the responses given to a Questionnaire instance so far.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Responses display by question type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Numeric====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-34-46.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column 1 displays the number of similar responses. Column 2 displays the responses given. The Total and Average cells are self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Yes/No====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-41-00.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows that out of 5 respondents who responded to this questionnaire, one did not answer this Yes/No question (which was not set as Required). 3 respondents answered Yes (75%) and 1 answered No (25%). Please note that the percentages are calculated on the actual responses, not the total of those who submitted the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-46-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows that 5 our 5 respondents who submitted this questionnaire answered that question (which was Required).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Check boxes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-50-19.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows for instance that the Forum and Glossary activities are favoured by 4 respondents (out of 5 who responded), accounting for 27% of the choices each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Rate question====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-54-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics for Rate questions display 2 tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;top table&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the Average rank for each feature. In this screenshot, the &amp;quot;Formatting your course&amp;quot; feature of Moodle was rated on average 1.4 on the 1 to 4 scale of difficulty, i.e. that feature was rated as between &amp;quot;Very...&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Easy...&amp;quot; to use.&lt;br /&gt;
When creating that Rate question, the following values were entered for each &amp;quot;possible answer&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 4=Very easy to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 3=Easy to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 2=Somewhat difficult to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 1=Difficult to use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is to say that the highest &amp;quot;mark&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; was given to the easiest choice.&lt;br /&gt;
So, the average values (between parentheses) immediately after the average ranks are here the inverse of the average ranks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom table&#039;&#039;&#039; displays for each feature the number and percentage of respondents who selected each choice. For instance, for the &amp;quot;Formatting your course&amp;quot; feature, 3 respondents (60% of respondents to that question) selected the &amp;quot;Very easy to use&amp;quot; choice, and 2 respondents (40% of respondents to that question) selected the &amp;quot;Easy to use&amp;quot; choice. Nobody selected the &amp;quot;Difficult&amp;quot; choices for that feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Essay question====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 19-04-02.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;full name&amp;quot; (i.e. non anonymous), the respondent&#039;s name will be displayed next to their Essay response. Click on the respondent&#039;s name to view their full submission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:16-10-2013 13-45-08.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Visible groups&#039;&#039;, or is set to &#039;&#039;Separate groups&#039;&#039; and the current user has the &#039;&#039;moodle/site:accessallgroups capability&#039;&#039; (in the current context), and groups have been defined in the current course, then the user has access to a dropdown list of groups. This dropdown list enables the user to &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot; the questionnaire responses by groups. If the setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Separate groups&#039;&#039;, then users who do not have the &#039;&#039;moodle/site:accessallgroups&#039;&#039; capability (usually students, or non-editing teachers, etc.) will only be able to view the responses of the group(s) they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;All participants&#039;&#039; includes responses from all the people who answered the questionnaire, including people not belonging to any group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;.- After you have used the dropdown list to select a &amp;quot;set of people&amp;quot; for displaying their responses, the &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot; remains active for the following operations: &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete ALL Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;View by Response&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example, if you selected to display &#039;&#039;&#039;All Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; for group &amp;quot;Sparrows&amp;quot; and then click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete ALL Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; tab link, a confirmation message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete all responses for members of group &amp;quot;Sparrows&amp;quot; and only responses of those participants. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a participant belongs to more than one group, then deleting all the responses for &#039;&#039;one of the Groups&#039;&#039; he belongs to will of course delete his responses from &#039;&#039;all the other groups&#039;&#039; he belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List of responses===&lt;br /&gt;
==== View Individual Responses ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Respondent Type&#039;&#039;&#039; was set as “fullname”, users with the necessary permissions (usually only teachers or tutors) can view each response individually. &lt;br /&gt;
On the List of responses page, each respondent&#039;s name is displayed, in alphabetical order of the family name.&lt;br /&gt;
Upon mouseover, a tooltip displays the submission time-stamp. This is especially useful in case the questionnaire is set to answer more than once and some students have submitted more than one response.&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a respondent&#039;s name to display their submission to the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Individual Responses Navigation====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:05-08-2013 18-46-20.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are viewing a respondent&#039;s individual response, use the navigation bar at the top to go to the Previous (in alphabetical order) or Next response. You can go back to the List of responses page at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Print this Response ====&lt;br /&gt;
Opens printer-friendly window with current Response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Delete this Response ====&lt;br /&gt;
Deletes current response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Order Responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
When displaying All Responses you can order the choices by number of responses (the Average column) for the following 4 types of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single choices radio button &lt;br /&gt;
* single choices drop-down list &lt;br /&gt;
* multiple choices (check boxes) &lt;br /&gt;
* rate questions (including Likert scales). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you arrive on the All Responses page, by default all responses are ordered in the order that the questionnaire creator entered the question choices. You can choose to order them by ascending or descending order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete All Responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Deletes all responses in current questionnaire instance. Can be used to “reset” a questionnaire if you no longer need the current data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Download in text format  ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature enables you to save all the responses of a questionnaire to a text file (CSV). This file can then be imported into a spreadsheet (e.g. MS Excel or Open Office Calc) or a statistical package for further processing the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Options for text download====&lt;br /&gt;
On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039; page you have a set of 2 options which only concern the output of the radio buttons/single answer question type. Here is how these options work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question text: What is your favorite color? Choice: blue, green, red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| selected color &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice codes&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice text&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice codes + Include choice text &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 1&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;blue &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 2&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;green &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 3&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;red &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| No Include box ticked = same as include choice text box ticked &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these output options are over-ridden in case you used the &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option when you created your radio button questions, i.e. the named values will be exported as data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red=the color of blood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue=the color of the sky&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Black=opposite of white &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;What is your favorite color?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the color of blood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the color of the sky&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
opposite of white &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;Irrespective of the Include choice codes/text options selected on the Download in text format page, this will output the values &#039;&#039;&#039;Red&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Blue&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Black&#039;&#039;&#039; to the CSV file.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The CSV file (how to use it)====&lt;br /&gt;
The text format available here is of the so-called CSV (comma separated values) type. However, for more universal use, the &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; (tabulation) separator is used, rather than the comma or semi-colon. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039; button, a window opens, asking you whether you&#039;d like to save the data file or open it. Select &#039;&#039;save&#039;&#039;. The data file is named after the name of the current quiz, however you can save it under a different name. The proposed data file extension is *.txt, but you &#039;&#039;can&#039;&#039; rename it. Note that you &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; rename it with a *.csv extension for import into &#039;&#039;Open Office Calc&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;LibreOffice Calc&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to your external software, and open the file into it. The following operations depend on the software you are using and on a number of other parameters. If you are using a non-ascii language interface in Moodle or you are using the English language but some of your questionnaire questions (or responses) have non-ascii characters in them, then &#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039; (or &#039;&#039;Open Office Calc&#039;&#039;) might be able to &#039;&#039;automatically detect&#039;&#039; that your file is UTF-8 encoded, and decode it accordingly. Please note that if most of your data file is using standard ascii characters and only a very small number of non-ascii characters are present, the automatic detection will not work, and you will have to &#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039; select the UTF-8 encoding in the list provided by your software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the &amp;quot;table&amp;quot; imported into e.g. &#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;, the first line contains the names of all the question fields. This is followed by one line per response. The first 7 fields are as follows (in the English version): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Response&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Submitted on:&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Institution&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Department&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Course&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Group&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| ID&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Full name&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Username&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The submitted_date field contains the date (and time, i.e. hour minutes seconds) when the response was submitted by respondent. For example: 15/09/2007 15:57. Normally you should be able to use Excel cell formatting to display such dates at will, in your own language formatting conventions, including the seconds, and if you wish full day or months names, while retaining the sorting facility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire was set as &amp;quot;anonymous responses&amp;quot;, the ID and Username will be empty and the Full name field will display &amp;quot;Anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Your responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Questionnaire Report page, users with the necessary permissions can view their own responses on the page entitled “Your results”. Usually students will be allowed to view their own responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire&#039;s settings allow more than one response and more than one response have been entered by the current user, then all of the features of the “View All responses” explained above apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not possible to delete individual responses in this “Your responses” view. And the Download as text format is not available to users with the student role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== All your responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
This provides a view of all of a respondent&#039;s responses, on successive dates. This feature may be useful if a questionnaire is used as a kind of portfolio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Show Non-Respondents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the teacher to see students who have not yet responded. A reminder message can be sent to individuals or to everyone that hasn’t submitted responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of &amp;quot;non-respondents&amp;quot; can be filtered by Group (if Groups are enabled for this course and activity).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Save/Resume answers&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to Yes, then the list shows those students who have started but not yet submitted their questionnaire responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-15-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Voir_les_réponses_du_Questionnaire]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Viendo respuestas de un cuestionario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111311</id>
		<title>Questionnaire index view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111311"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:52:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
When the Activities block is activated in a course which contains one or more questionnaire instances, clicking on the Questionnaire link in that block will display a list of all those questionnaire instances, with relevant information.&lt;br /&gt;
=Student view=&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-09-06.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed. (1)&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;Save and Resume&amp;quot; and a student has saved their progress, the latest Saved date will be displayed. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* When a questionnaire has been submitted, the Submission date will be displayed. (3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Teacher view=&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of responses submitted is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The questionnaire type is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
** For Public questionnaires, there are two cases. &lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-28-37.jpg]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Case#1 (screenshot above) If the public questionnaire was originally created in the current course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) other courses, a list of those copies (and the name of the other courses using that original questionnaire) is displayed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-34-29.jpg]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Case#2  (screenshot above) If the public questionnaire was originally created in another course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) the current course, the name of that original questionnaire is displayed (as well as the full name of the course where it was created).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If the current user (teacher) is enrolled as teacher in those other courses (where the original questionnaire or copies of the current original one is/are located), then the name of the questionnaires is an active link to the Preview page of the questionnaires in the other courses. If the current user is an Admin, then all links are active.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111310</id>
		<title>Questionnaire index view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111310"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:50:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Teacher view */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the Activities block is activated in a course which contains one or more questionnaire instances, clicking on the Questionnaire link in that block will display a list of all those questionnaire instances, with relevant information.&lt;br /&gt;
=Student view=&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-09-06.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed. (1)&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;Save and Resume&amp;quot; and a student has saved their progress, the latest Saved date will be displayed. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* When a questionnaire has been submitted, the Submission date will be displayed. (3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Teacher view=&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of responses submitted is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The questionnaire type is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
** For Public questionnaires, there are two cases. &lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-28-37.jpg]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Case#1 (screenshot above) If the public questionnaire was originally created in the current course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) other courses, a list of those copies (and the name of the other courses using that original questionnaire) is displayed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-34-29.jpg]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Case#2  (screenshot above) If the public questionnaire was originally created in another course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) the current course, the name of that original questionnaire is displayed (as well as the full name of the course where it was created).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If the current user (teacher) is enrolled as teacher in those other courses (where the original questionnaire or copies of the current original one is/are located), then the name of the questionnaires is an active link to the Preview page of the questionnaires in the other courses. If the current user is an Admin, then all links are active.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Template:Questionnaire&amp;diff=111309</id>
		<title>Template:Questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Template:Questionnaire&amp;diff=111309"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:49:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;navtrail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Main page]] ► [[Managing a Moodle course]] ► [[Activities]] ► [[Questionnaire]] ► [[{{PAGENAME}}]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;sideblock right&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 12em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;header&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Questionnaire]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding/editing a questionnaire]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up a questionnaire|Advanced settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Editing Questionnaire questions|Adding questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Viewing Questionnaire responses|Viewing responses]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Questionnaire Conditional branching|Conditional branching]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Questionnaire Personality test|Personality test]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Questionnaire_index_view|Index View]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=mod/questionnaire/index&amp;diff=111308</id>
		<title>mod/questionnaire/index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=mod/questionnaire/index&amp;diff=111308"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:43:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: Redirected page to Questionnaire index view&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Questionnaire_index_view]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111307</id>
		<title>Questionnaire index view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111307"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:42:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Teacher view */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the Activities block is activated in a course which contains one or more questionnaire instances, clicking on the Questionnaire link in that block will display a list of all those questionnaire instances, with relevant information.&lt;br /&gt;
=Student view=&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-09-06.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed. (1)&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;Save and Resume&amp;quot; and a student has saved their progress, the latest Saved date will be displayed. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* When a questionnaire has been submitted, the Submission date will be displayed. (3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Teacher view=&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of responses submitted is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The questionnaire type is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
** For Public questionnaires, there are two cases.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-28-37.jpg]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Case#1 (screenshot above) If the public questionnaire was originally created in the current course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) other courses, a list of those copies (and the name of the other courses using that original questionnaire) is displayed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-34-29.jpg]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Case#2  (screenshot above) If the public questionnaire was originally created in another course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) the current course, the name of that original questionnaire is displayed (as well as the full name of the course where it was created).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If the current user (teacher) is enrolled as teacher in those other courses (where the original questionnaire or copies of the current original one is/are located), then the name of the questionnaires is an active link to the Preview page of the questionnaires in the other courses. If the current user is an Admin, then all links are active.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_16-34-29.jpg&amp;diff=111306</id>
		<title>File:2014-03-23 16-34-29.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_16-34-29.jpg&amp;diff=111306"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:37:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_16-28-37.jpg&amp;diff=111305</id>
		<title>File:2014-03-23 16-28-37.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_16-28-37.jpg&amp;diff=111305"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:30:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111304</id>
		<title>Questionnaire index view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111304"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:27:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Student view */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the Activities block is activated in a course which contains one or more questionnaire instances, clicking on the Questionnaire link in that block will display a list of all those questionnaire instances, with relevant information.&lt;br /&gt;
=Student view=&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-03-23 16-09-06.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed. (1)&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;Save and Resume&amp;quot; and a student has saved their progress, the latest Saved date will be displayed. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* When a questionnaire has been submitted, the Submission date will be displayed. (3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Teacher view=&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of responses submitted is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The questionnaire type is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
** For Public questionnaires, there are two cases.&lt;br /&gt;
*** If the public questionnaire was originally created in the current course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) other courses, a list of those copies (and the name of the other courses using that original questionnaire) is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*** If the public questionnaire was originally created in another course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) the current course, the name of that original questionnaire is displayed (as well as the full name of the course where it was created).&lt;br /&gt;
*** Note.- If the current user (teacher) is enrolled as teacher in those other courses (where the original questionnaire or copies of the current original one is/are located), then the name of the questionnaires is an active link to the Preview page of the questionnaires in the other courses.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_16-09-06.jpg&amp;diff=111303</id>
		<title>File:2014-03-23 16-09-06.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_16-09-06.jpg&amp;diff=111303"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:27:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111302</id>
		<title>Questionnaire index view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111302"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T15:22:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the Activities block is activated in a course which contains one or more questionnaire instances, clicking on the Questionnaire link in that block will display a list of all those questionnaire instances, with relevant information.&lt;br /&gt;
=Student view=&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;Save and Resume&amp;quot; and a student has saved their progress, the latest Saved date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* When a questionnaire has been submitted, the Submission date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
=Teacher view=&lt;br /&gt;
* If a questionnaire has a due/closing date, that date will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of responses submitted is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The questionnaire type is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
** For Public questionnaires, there are two cases.&lt;br /&gt;
*** If the public questionnaire was originally created in the current course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) other courses, a list of those copies (and the name of the other courses using that original questionnaire) is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*** If the public questionnaire was originally created in another course, and if it is being used in (i.e. it has been &amp;quot;copied&amp;quot; to) the current course, the name of that original questionnaire is displayed (as well as the full name of the course where it was created).&lt;br /&gt;
*** Note.- If the current user (teacher) is enrolled as teacher in those other courses (where the original questionnaire or copies of the current original one is/are located), then the name of the questionnaires is an active link to the Preview page of the questionnaires in the other courses.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111301</id>
		<title>Questionnaire index view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_index_view&amp;diff=111301"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T14:24:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: Created page with &amp;quot;TODO&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TODO&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=mod/questionnaire/index&amp;diff=111300</id>
		<title>mod/questionnaire/index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=mod/questionnaire/index&amp;diff=111300"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T14:19:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: Created page with &amp;quot;TODO&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TODO&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Setting_up_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=111299</id>
		<title>Setting up a questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Setting_up_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=111299"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T14:15:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Public questionnaire roll out to multiple courses */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created a questionnaire you can define extra settings in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; link/tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Questionnaire Type===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three types of questionnaires:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Private &#039;&#039;&#039; - belongs to the course it is defined in only. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; This is the standard Moodle module concept. You create a questionnaire and its questions for the course it is defined in. Editing teachers of that course can change the questionnaire and all teachers can review the results.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Template &#039;&#039;&#039; - can be copied and edited. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; This type of questionnaire cannot be used directly, but its content can be copied into a new questionnaire and edited.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Public &#039;&#039;&#039; - can be shared among courses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; If a questionnaire has already been created (in another course on the same Moodle site) with the &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; setting, then you may use that &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; questionnaire in your own course(s). The number of settings available to such questionnaires is limited and you cannot edit its questions nor view the responses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a public questionnaire has been created in course A, it can be &amp;quot;used&amp;quot; in courses B, C, ... All the responses from courses A, B, C, ... are collected in the public questionnaire created in course A (the original course where it was created) and are viewable there by the person (admin or teacher) who originally created it.&lt;br /&gt;
====Public questionnaire roll out to multiple courses====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create a Public questionnaire whose aliases can be placed in several courses. The student responses will only be visible in the course where the original Public questionnaire has been created. There are mainly 2 applications of this setup. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
case 1.- An admin may want to see course evaluations by students without the course teachers seeing those evaluations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
case 2.- A teacher teaching several courses may want to &amp;quot;consolidate&amp;quot; the results of several questionnaires (in his various courses) into one unique Public questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s how you do it (for case1)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a course that will simply be a shell for any public questionnaires. Give it whatever title you like, e.g. PubQuestCourse. You can hide the course entirely. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create your questionnaire in this course. Call it e.g. &amp;quot;Public questionnaire01&amp;quot; On the &amp;quot;Advanced settings&amp;quot; page, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039;&#039; for the questionnaire type.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add questions in this public questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Navigate to the course where you want to place an alias of that Public questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add an activity or resource: Questionnaire. Edit all the various settings. Name it e.g. Questionnaire01. For Response options|Type, we suggest you select Respond once. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2014-03-23 15-03-50.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the Content options section, in the radio buttons list, under Use public, the title of the public questionnaire you created in the other course (PubQuestCourse) will appear (e.g. Public questionnaire01): check its radio button. Then finish editing (click the Save and return to course button).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that starting with version 2.6, the Content options section now distinguishes &#039;&#039;Copy existing&#039;&#039; (for questionnaires in current course) from &#039;&#039;Use template&#039;&#039; (template courses may reside in other courses). Also, the course which each existing/available questionnaire belongs to is displayed between square brackets.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are not sure about the actual contents of a questionnaire you would like to &amp;quot;copy&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;use&amp;quot;, clicking on its title will link to a Preview pop-up window.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note.- For options 4-6 above, an admin may ask individual teachers to create those questionnaires based on a public questionnaire in their own courses, giving them detailed instructions on how to proceed. Unfortunately at the moment there is no way to automatically deploy a public questionnaire to other courses, it has to be done &amp;quot;by hand&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Student responses will appear in the original questionnaire (e.g. &amp;quot;Public questionnaire01&amp;quot; in course PubQuestCourse), but will not be visible at all in the &amp;quot;local&amp;quot; questionnaire (alias). Teachers will not be able to respond to it or view their students&#039; responses.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT&#039;&#039;&#039; Please note that when you delete a Public questionnaire, you also delete the links to its &amp;quot;dependent&amp;quot; questionnaires in the other courses on your moodle site. If a Public questionnaire is no longer used, the normal procedure is to go to all the other courses that &amp;quot;use&amp;quot; that Public questionnaire and delete them first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Template questionnaire used in multiple courses====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the responses to your questionnaire should remain accessible in the course in which it resides, but the questionnaire itself will follow a standard format with the same questions, use a template-type of questionnaire. So instead of re-creating the questions for each questionnaire, you can apply the template questionnaire to each one you create.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s how you do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a course that will simply be a shell for any template questionnaires. Give it whatever title you like e.g. TempQuestCourse. You can hide the course entirely. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create your questionnaire in this course. On the &amp;quot;Advanced settings&amp;quot; page, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Template&#039;&#039;&#039; for the questionnaire type.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add questions in this template questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Navigate to the course where you want to place an alias of that Template questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add an activity or resource: Questionnaire. Edit all the various settings. Name it e.g. Questionnaire02.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10-10-2013 10-07-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the Content options section, in the radio buttons list, under Copy existing, the title of the Template questionnaire you created in the other course (TempQuestCourse) will appear (e.g. Template questionnaire01): check its radio button. Then finish editing (click the Save and return to course button).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t want your teachers to view or alter questionnaire responses, just define this in the Define Roles settings for Questionnaires. In Define Roles, you can limit teachers from being able to delete responses from the questionnaire, or be able to submit their own questionnaires or view responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Title/Sub-title===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the questionnaire, which will appear at the top of every page. By default Title is set to the questionnaire Name, but you can edit it as you like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Info===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be displayed at the top of the first page of the questionnaire. (i.e. instructions, background info, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Confirmation URL/page===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heading (in bold) and body text for the &amp;quot;Confirmation&amp;quot; page displayed after a user completes this questionnaire. (URL, if present, takes precedence over confirmation text.) If you leave this field empty, a default message will be displayed upon questionnaire completion (&#039;&#039;Thank you for completing this Questionnaire&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a copy of each submission to the specified address or addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
You can provide more than one address by separating them with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank for no email backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_15-03-50.jpg&amp;diff=111298</id>
		<title>File:2014-03-23 15-03-50.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-03-23_15-03-50.jpg&amp;diff=111298"/>
		<updated>2014-03-23T14:07:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Question_types&amp;diff=109821</id>
		<title>Question types</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Question_types&amp;diff=109821"/>
		<updated>2014-02-11T13:48:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Description */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}You may add a variety of different types of questions in the Quiz and Lesson modules.  This page is about [[Quiz module]] question types; some will be similar  to [[Lesson questions]] types, which are fewer in number and function differently. The standard quiz question types are listed below with brief descriptions. &#039;&#039;&#039;Please use the links on the right side of this page to find more detailed information about standard questions types.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Standard question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculated ===&lt;br /&gt;
Calculated questions offer a way to create individual numerical questions by the use of wildcards that are substituted with individual values when the quiz is taken. [[Calculated_question_type|More on the Calculated question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculated multi-choice===&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculated simple===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
This question type is not actually a question. It just prints some text (and possibly graphics) without requiring an answer. This can be used to provide some information to be used by a subsequent group of questions, for example. [[Description_question_type|More on the Description question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Essay ===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows students to write at length on a particular subject and must be manually graded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for a teacher to create a template to scaffold the student&#039;s answer in order to give them extra support. The template is then reproduced in the text editor when the student starts to answer the question. See  Youtube video [http://youtu.be/BAZa66WvyWQ Essay scaffold with the Moodle quiz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:templatebox.png|thumb|Response template in question set up screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:quiztemplate.png|thumb|What the student sees]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
A list of sub-questions is provided, along with a list of answers. The respondent must &amp;quot;match&amp;quot; the correct answers with each question. [[Matching_question_type|More on the Matching question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Embedded Answers ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cloze_test Cloze Test] / Gap Fill) ===&lt;br /&gt;
These very flexible questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers. [[Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type|More on the Embedded Answers question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple choice ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the [[Multiple Choice question type]] you can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Short Answer ===&lt;br /&gt;
In response to a question (that may include an image), the respondent types a word or phrase. There may several possible correct answers, with different grades. Answers may or may not be sensitive to case. [[Short-Answer_question_type|More on the Short Answer question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Numerical ===&lt;br /&gt;
From the student perspective, a numerical question looks just like a short-answer question. The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. [[Numerical_question_type|More on the Numerical question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Random short-answer matching===&lt;br /&gt;
=== True/False ===&lt;br /&gt;
In response to a question (that may include an image), the respondent selects from two options: True or False. [[True/False_question_type|More on the True/False question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Third-party question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Besides the standard question types that are part of the core Moodle distribution, there are a number of [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=29 question type add-ons] in [https://moodle.org/plugins the add-ons database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of those add-ons have additional documentation in [[Third-party_question_types|Third-party question types]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lesson questions]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:Tipus_de_preguntes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipos de preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdera-motak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Types de questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題タイプ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Adding/editing_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109820</id>
		<title>Adding/editing a questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Adding/editing_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109820"/>
		<updated>2014-02-11T13:43:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* ALL Response viewing */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the date window for when users can complete the questionnaire. You can leave the boxes unchecked if you want the questionnaire to be continually available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Response options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select whether users will be allowed to respond once, daily, weekly, monthly or an unlimited number of times (&#039;&#039;&#039;many&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Respondent Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can display your users&#039; full names with each response by setting this to &amp;quot;fullname&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; You can hide your users&#039; identities from the responses by setting this to &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot; option has been set in a questionnaire, it&#039;s impossible to revert to the &amp;quot;fullname&amp;quot; option, for obvious privacy reasons. So be careful when you set your questionnaire to &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If your Moodle course allows guests, they will only be allowed to respond to a questionnaire whose responses have been set to &#039;&#039;anonymous&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Respondent Eligibility===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decide whether everyone can answer or whether you want to restrict it to tutor only or student only responses.  For restricted access options remember to assign the correct roles either at the course or activity level.  For example, if you put a questionnaire on the front page, intended for teachers only, then you will have to let Moodle know which users are teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ALL Responses viewing===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WHEN====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify &#039;&#039;&#039;when&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can see the responses of ALL respondents to submitted questionnaires (i.e. the general statistics tables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can view ALL responses -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; After answering the questionnaire&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; After the questionnaire is closed&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Always.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WHO (Which role can see what)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with Questionnaire version 2.&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WHO&amp;quot; can view the ALL Responses report&#039;&#039; page settings have been moved to the Roles and Permissions settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with all other Roles and capabilities settings in Moodle, you can set those permissions at site level, course level or activity level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following table sums up the correlation between the Questionnaire Response Options Settings and the Permissions settings. As you can see, the Roles and Permissions settings can OVERRIDE the Response options settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-02-11_14-26-23.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save/Resume answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this option allows users to save their answers to a questionnaire before submitting them. Users can leave the questionnaire unfinished and resume from the save point at a later date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow branching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Conditional Branching feature enables the Questionnaire creator to &amp;quot;branch&amp;quot; the respondent to different pages according to their choice of response to Yes/No, Dropdown boxes or Radio button questions. This option is enabled by default when you create a new questionnaire. If you do not plan to use this feature in the questionnaire, you should set it to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the Quiz or Lesson Moodle activities the questionnaire activity is not meant to test the student&#039;s knowledge and therefore the responses cannot/should not be graded as correct or incorrect. However, in order to encourage the students to complete a questionnaire, you may choose to award the student a grade (on a 1-100 scale) upon completion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select one of the radio button options. &#039;Create new&#039; is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; You can create questionnaires using three different methods: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Create New: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::This option allows you to create a completely new questionnaire from scratch.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Copy Existing: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::This option copies a pre-existing questionnaire&#039;s content to a new questionnaire, pre-seeding the content. You can copy questionnaires belonging to the course, or ones specifically marked as &#039;template&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Use Public: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::If a questionnaire has already been created (in another course on the same Moodle site) with the &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; setting, then you may use that &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; questionnaire in your own course(s). The number of settings available to such questionnaires is limited and you cannot edit its questions nor view the responses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Example &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a public questionnaire has been created in course A, it can be &amp;quot;used&amp;quot; in courses B, C, ... All the responses from courses A, B, C, ... are collected in the public questionnaire created in course A (the original course where it was created) and are viewable there by the person (admin or teacher) who originally created it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un questionnaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Adding/editing_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109819</id>
		<title>Adding/editing a questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Adding/editing_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109819"/>
		<updated>2014-02-11T13:42:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Response viewing */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the date window for when users can complete the questionnaire. You can leave the boxes unchecked if you want the questionnaire to be continually available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Response options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select whether users will be allowed to respond once, daily, weekly, monthly or an unlimited number of times (&#039;&#039;&#039;many&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Respondent Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can display your users&#039; full names with each response by setting this to &amp;quot;fullname&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; You can hide your users&#039; identities from the responses by setting this to &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot; option has been set in a questionnaire, it&#039;s impossible to revert to the &amp;quot;fullname&amp;quot; option, for obvious privacy reasons. So be careful when you set your questionnaire to &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If your Moodle course allows guests, they will only be allowed to respond to a questionnaire whose responses have been set to &#039;&#039;anonymous&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Respondent Eligibility===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decide whether everyone can answer or whether you want to restrict it to tutor only or student only responses.  For restricted access options remember to assign the correct roles either at the course or activity level.  For example, if you put a questionnaire on the front page, intended for teachers only, then you will have to let Moodle know which users are teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ALL Response viewing===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WHEN====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify &#039;&#039;&#039;when&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can see the responses of ALL respondents to submitted questionnaires (i.e. the general statistics tables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can view ALL responses -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; After answering the questionnaire&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; After the questionnaire is closed&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Always.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WHO (Which role can see what)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with Questionnaire version 2.&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WHO&amp;quot; can view the ALL Responses report&#039;&#039; page settings have been moved to the Roles and Permissions settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with all other Roles and capabilities settings in Moodle, you can set those permissions at site level, course level or activity level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following table sums up the correlation between the Questionnaire Response Options Settings and the Permissions settings. As you can see, the Roles and Permissions settings can OVERRIDE the Response options settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-02-11_14-26-23.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save/Resume answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this option allows users to save their answers to a questionnaire before submitting them. Users can leave the questionnaire unfinished and resume from the save point at a later date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow branching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Conditional Branching feature enables the Questionnaire creator to &amp;quot;branch&amp;quot; the respondent to different pages according to their choice of response to Yes/No, Dropdown boxes or Radio button questions. This option is enabled by default when you create a new questionnaire. If you do not plan to use this feature in the questionnaire, you should set it to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the Quiz or Lesson Moodle activities the questionnaire activity is not meant to test the student&#039;s knowledge and therefore the responses cannot/should not be graded as correct or incorrect. However, in order to encourage the students to complete a questionnaire, you may choose to award the student a grade (on a 1-100 scale) upon completion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select one of the radio button options. &#039;Create new&#039; is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; You can create questionnaires using three different methods: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Create New: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::This option allows you to create a completely new questionnaire from scratch.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Copy Existing: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::This option copies a pre-existing questionnaire&#039;s content to a new questionnaire, pre-seeding the content. You can copy questionnaires belonging to the course, or ones specifically marked as &#039;template&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Use Public: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::If a questionnaire has already been created (in another course on the same Moodle site) with the &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; setting, then you may use that &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; questionnaire in your own course(s). The number of settings available to such questionnaires is limited and you cannot edit its questions nor view the responses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Example &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a public questionnaire has been created in course A, it can be &amp;quot;used&amp;quot; in courses B, C, ... All the responses from courses A, B, C, ... are collected in the public questionnaire created in course A (the original course where it was created) and are viewable there by the person (admin or teacher) who originally created it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un questionnaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Adding/editing_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109818</id>
		<title>Adding/editing a questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Adding/editing_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109818"/>
		<updated>2014-02-11T13:34:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Response viewing */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the date window for when users can complete the questionnaire. You can leave the boxes unchecked if you want the questionnaire to be continually available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Response options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select whether users will be allowed to respond once, daily, weekly, monthly or an unlimited number of times (&#039;&#039;&#039;many&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Respondent Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can display your users&#039; full names with each response by setting this to &amp;quot;fullname&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; You can hide your users&#039; identities from the responses by setting this to &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot; option has been set in a questionnaire, it&#039;s impossible to revert to the &amp;quot;fullname&amp;quot; option, for obvious privacy reasons. So be careful when you set your questionnaire to &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If your Moodle course allows guests, they will only be allowed to respond to a questionnaire whose responses have been set to &#039;&#039;anonymous&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Respondent Eligibility===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decide whether everyone can answer or whether you want to restrict it to tutor only or student only responses.  For restricted access options remember to assign the correct roles either at the course or activity level.  For example, if you put a questionnaire on the front page, intended for teachers only, then you will have to let Moodle know which users are teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response viewing===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WHEN====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify &#039;&#039;&#039;when&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can see the responses of all respondents to submitted questionnaires (general statistics tables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can view ALL responses -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; After answering the questionnaire&#039;&#039;&#039;. This allows students to see all responses after answering a questionnaire that is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;respond once only&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. If a questionnaire is set to respond more than once, then students cannot see all responses unless you use one of the next two options.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; After the questionnaire is closed&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Always.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WHO (Which role can see what)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with Questionnaire version 2.&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WHO&amp;quot; can view the ALL Responses report&#039;&#039; page settings have been moved to the Roles and Permissions settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with all other Roles and capabilities settings in Moodle, you can set those permissions at site level, course level or activity level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following table sums up the correlation between the Questionnaire Response Options Settings and the Permissions settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-02-11_14-26-23.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save/Resume answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this option allows users to save their answers to a questionnaire before submitting them. Users can leave the questionnaire unfinished and resume from the save point at a later date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow branching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Conditional Branching feature enables the Questionnaire creator to &amp;quot;branch&amp;quot; the respondent to different pages according to their choice of response to Yes/No, Dropdown boxes or Radio button questions. This option is enabled by default when you create a new questionnaire. If you do not plan to use this feature in the questionnaire, you should set it to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the Quiz or Lesson Moodle activities the questionnaire activity is not meant to test the student&#039;s knowledge and therefore the responses cannot/should not be graded as correct or incorrect. However, in order to encourage the students to complete a questionnaire, you may choose to award the student a grade (on a 1-100 scale) upon completion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select one of the radio button options. &#039;Create new&#039; is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; You can create questionnaires using three different methods: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Create New: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::This option allows you to create a completely new questionnaire from scratch.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Copy Existing: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::This option copies a pre-existing questionnaire&#039;s content to a new questionnaire, pre-seeding the content. You can copy questionnaires belonging to the course, or ones specifically marked as &#039;template&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039; Use Public: &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::If a questionnaire has already been created (in another course on the same Moodle site) with the &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; setting, then you may use that &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; questionnaire in your own course(s). The number of settings available to such questionnaires is limited and you cannot edit its questions nor view the responses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Example &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a public questionnaire has been created in course A, it can be &amp;quot;used&amp;quot; in courses B, C, ... All the responses from courses A, B, C, ... are collected in the public questionnaire created in course A (the original course where it was created) and are viewable there by the person (admin or teacher) who originally created it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un questionnaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-02-11_14-26-23.jpg&amp;diff=109817</id>
		<title>File:2014-02-11 14-26-23.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-02-11_14-26-23.jpg&amp;diff=109817"/>
		<updated>2014-02-11T13:29:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=109623</id>
		<title>Questionnaire Personality test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=109623"/>
		<updated>2014-02-01T16:53:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Chart types */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
A personality test is a tool that attempts to measure a person&#039;s social interaction skills and patterns of behavior. (US legal definition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Moodle Questionnaire add-on, the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature enables a questionnaire creator to attribute different &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; to the answers to certain types of questions. Those values can be added into scores - globally or in several &amp;quot;sections&amp;quot; - and relevant feedback messages based on those scores can be displayed to the respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the particular nature of the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature, great care should be exercised when using it in questionnaires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organization===&lt;br /&gt;
The following question types can be used with the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature: &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;. In order for the answers to those questions to be &amp;quot;scored&amp;quot;, they &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; have a &#039;&#039;&#039;question name&#039;&#039;&#039;, must be &#039;&#039;&#039;required&#039;&#039;&#039; and each of their choices must have a &#039;&#039;&#039;value&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039; question, the default values are 1 for a Yes answer and 0 for a No. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See the examples below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adapted from [http://www.personalitytest.net/funtest/hrdept.htm www.personalitytest.net]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039; (or Dropdown Box) question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;feel your best&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. We are giving question Q1 a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and setting it as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039; because we plan to use it in the Personality test feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: When do you feel your best?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***2=In the morning&lt;br /&gt;
***4=During the afternoon and early evening&lt;br /&gt;
***6=Late at night&lt;br /&gt;
Each possible answer choice begins with a value &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign (=) &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the choice words(*). The values attributed to the various choices must be carefully considered in order to obtain a coherent &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; when they are added up in the feedback score calculation. Here we are using the values as given in the &amp;quot;personality fun test&amp;quot; of our example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(*) &#039;&#039;&#039;No space&#039;&#039;&#039; before nor after the equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue to create all 10 questions in the sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select the first option available, i.e. Global Feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Since we have selected the Global feedback option, all those questions have been default-set in Section 1, the only section available here. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
Normally, you have nothing to change on that page. However you might want to remove one or several questions from the list by clicking the 0 radio button instead of the (Section) 1 button.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback heading=====&lt;br /&gt;
* This begins with a list of the names of all the questions that are used in this Global Feedback section.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039; text box should be kept as short as possible. It will be displayed in the Feedback report and - when the Chart feature is avaiblable in a later version of Questionnaire - will be used in the Charts.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the &#039;&#039;Heading&#039;&#039; field you may type a brief heading text. You may use 2 variables in this heading, $scorepercent and $oppositescorepercent. One example is: &amp;quot;You scored $scorepercent in this questionnaire.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback messages=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, still taken from our sample Personality &amp;quot;Fun&amp;quot; test.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as someone they should &amp;quot;handle with care&amp;quot; You&#039;re seen as vain, self-centered, and who is extremely dominant. Others may admire you, wishing they could be more like you, but don&#039;t always trust you, hesitating to become too deeply involved with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**94% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as an exciting, highly volatile, rather impulsive personality; a natural leader, who&#039;s quick to make decisions, though not always the right ones. [etc.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**85% &lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This starts with 3 default boundaries and associated messages, but you may add more boundaries if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 12-21-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This table shows the global score for respondent plus, if any, the average global score for all participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, this box may show the average global score for the group that the actual respondent belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first box of the Feedback Report we see the Heading text, which may include the value of the $scorepercent variable.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the second box we see the &amp;quot;personalized&amp;quot; feedback message, relevant to the Feedback score boundaries that the actual respondent&#039;s score sits in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the View all Responses page, the Feedback report heading will be displayed, together with the average Global score for All participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;visible&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, the average global score for the current group will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 13-42-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Several sections Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
A simplistic &amp;quot;health habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;sports&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you practise these sports?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***0=never&lt;br /&gt;
***1=once a month&lt;br /&gt;
***2=every week&lt;br /&gt;
***3=every day&lt;br /&gt;
***cycling&lt;br /&gt;
***running&lt;br /&gt;
***swimming&lt;br /&gt;
***walking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q2 as a &#039;&#039;yes/no&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;fruit and vegetables&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do you regularly eat fresh fruit and vegetables?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q3 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;smoking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you smoke?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one packet per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one packet per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one packet per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q4 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;drinking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you drink alcohol?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one glass per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one glass per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one glass per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select 2 Feedback sections.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-23-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the questions are not set into any Feedback Section (all radio buttons are set at 0). You now have to set each question into one of the 2 Sections you decided to display in your questionnaire&#039;s Feedback Report. At this stage, those 2 Feedback Sections have not yet been named, so you really have to be careful and make a mental note of &amp;quot;which is which&amp;quot;. Suppose you want Section 1 to be related to your respondents&#039; practise of sport, you would put question 1 into section 1 (click radio button 1 for that question). Now suppose you want your second section to be related to &amp;quot;healthy attitude&amp;quot; towards food, drinking and smoking; click all the remaining radio buttons &amp;quot;2&amp;quot; for questions 2, 3 and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose you get it wrong and you mistakenly put all of your questions in Section 1. Upon clicking on the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, this error message would be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;You must select at least ONE question per section!&lt;br /&gt;
Section(s) not selected: 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
You will now get a screen very similar to the one you get for Global Feedback messages (as in our previous example). But you will get several screens, one per section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** sports&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Physical activity&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;physical activity&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You must be very fit. Congratulations!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: Your physical activity is only average. Come on!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to be a real couch potato. Make an effort!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next section (2/2)&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** fruit and vegetables&lt;br /&gt;
** smoking&lt;br /&gt;
** drinking&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Healthy habits&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;healthy habits&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have quite healthy habits. Continue!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not very healthy habits. Make an effort to cut down on drinking and smoking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not terribly healthy habits. You must make a serious effort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-53-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This report is similar to the Global Feedback report in our previous example, except that now the score is separated into 2 sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bipolar results==&lt;br /&gt;
Some &amp;quot;personality tests&amp;quot; aim at detecting a bipolar characteristic in respondents&#039; character. For example, whether an individual&#039;s profile is rather visual or auditory, global or analytic, extrovert or introvert etc. See Julian Rotter&#039;s theory of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Julian_Rotter#Locus_of_control Locus of Control].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In such cases, you can enter the section labels as a set of 2 opposed (bipolar) concepts, separated by a pipe character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-58-51.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a questionnaire based on the Locus of Control theory, this &amp;quot;bipolar&amp;quot; heading will give the following kind of report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-13-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Chart display==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Upon installing or updating the Questionnaire plugin, its &amp;quot;site settings&amp;quot; page is displayed. On that &#039;&#039;Site administration ► Plugins ► Activity modules ► Questionnaire&#039;&#039; page, an admin can choose to enable the Chart feature site-wide. The default is &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; (do not enable). The Questionnaire Chart feature currently uses the [http://www.rgraph.net/ RGraph] libraries, which are licensed under the MIT type of open source license.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Chart types===&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the &#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039; page and click the &#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display or not the table of scores in the Feedback report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chart type drop down list that is available is dependent on the number of feedback sections in your questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Global Feedback (i.e. one section only): Bipolar bars or Vertical Progress bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 Sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
* More than 2 sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Radar or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your choice of Chart type depends on the type of questions in your questionnaire. It&#039;s up to you to find out the most suitable Chart type. The Bipolar bars type is only suited when your feedback sections include Bipolar_results (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected Chart will be displayed on the All Responses page. It will be constructed with all participants&#039; results or, if the questionnaire is set to Visible Groups, with the results of the currently selected group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On an Individual Responses page, the current user&#039;s current results Chart will be displayed, and also the All participants (or current group) results Chart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some samples illustrating the complete Chart types that can be used are displayed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical Progress bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-44-28.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bipolar bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-40-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horizontal bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-42-27.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-37-47.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-38-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questionnaire_test_de_personnalité]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Conditional_branching&amp;diff=109341</id>
		<title>Questionnaire Conditional branching</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Conditional_branching&amp;diff=109341"/>
		<updated>2014-01-26T11:18:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Individual Responses Report */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
Conditional branching (or Skip logic) is a feature that changes what question or page a respondent sees next based on how they answer the current question. Conditional branching creates a custom path through the survey that varies based on a respondent’s answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organization===&lt;br /&gt;
In the Questionnaire plugin, the Conditional branching path is organized through &#039;&#039;pages&#039;&#039;, containing one or more &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions depending on a &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use the Conditional branching feature in a Questionnaire, when you create or edit the questionnaire, in the Response options section of the settings, you must set the &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow branching questions&#039;&#039;&#039; option to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. Please note that this option is set to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A simple example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The flow we want to obtain===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 1&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 1 Do you own a car? Yes/No.&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer Yes -&amp;gt; go to page 2&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer No -&amp;gt; go to page 5 (i.e. skip over irrelevant questions in pages 2 through 4)&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 2&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 2: What is the color of your car?&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 3: Did you buy it new or second-hand?&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer new -&amp;gt; go to page 3&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer second-hand -&amp;gt; go to page 4&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 3&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 4: Did you pay your new car cash or did you get a bank loan?&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 4&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 5: Did you buy your second-hand car from a garage or directly from its previous owner?&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 5&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 6: Do you sometimes use public transport to go to work?&lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Procedure to obtain that flow===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a Yes/No question.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;own car&#039;&#039;. Note that you &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; give your question a name, as this name will be used later on in the Questionnaire to build the list of available Parent questions. Please keep this name as short as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. Since you plan to use question Q1 as a Parent question, it would not make sense to set it as non-required.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Do you own a car?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q1. No Page break will be inserted at this stage because you have not yet used a Parent question to create one or more Child questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q2 as a Text Box question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; (depending on what you want to do with that question&#039;s answers later on).&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;own car-&amp;gt;Yes&#039;&#039;. The Parent question (Q1) option offers 2 choices, since it is a Yes/No question.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;What is the colour of your car?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q2. Upon saving Child question Q2 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between the Parent question Q1 and its Child question Q2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q3 as a Radio Buttons (or Dropdown Box) question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;car status&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. We are giving question Q3 a name and setting it as Required because we plan to use it as a Parent question.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: own car-&amp;gt;Yes&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Did you buy it new or second-hand?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;new::I bought it new&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;used::I bought it second-hand&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
**Please note that in the Possible answers field we are using the &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; feature. You should use this feature if the full text of your Possible answers choices is fairly long.&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q3. Upon saving Child question Q3 you notice that no Page break has been inserted. This is because both Q2 and Q3 are Child questions of the same Parent question Q1 and thus will be displayed on the same page of the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q4 as a Radio Buttons question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: car status-&amp;gt;new&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**Please note that the list of potential Parent question choices displays the &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; that we entered for the Possible answers in Q3, instead of the full text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How did you pay for your new car?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I paid cash&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I got a bank loan&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q4. Upon saving Child question Q4 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between Parent question Q3 and its Child question Q4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q5 as a Radio Buttons question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: car status-&amp;gt;used&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Where did you buy your second-hand car? &lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I bought it from a garage&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I bought it directly from its previous owner&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q5. Upon saving Child question Q5 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between Child question Q4 and Child question Q5 because these two question do not have the same Parent question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q6 as YES/NO question type.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: None. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Question 6 is not dependent on any of the previous questions, and it will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent regardless of their previous answers.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do you sometimes use public transport to go to work?&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q6. Upon saving question Q6 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between Child question Q5 and question Q6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now continue creating questions normally, until you want to use Conditional branching again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is what your Manage questions section will look like after you have created those first 6 questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 17-49-53.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operations on Conditional branching questions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Move===&lt;br /&gt;
By using the standard Moodle &amp;quot;Move&amp;quot; icon you can move your questionnaire questions to different positions. However, due to the special nature of the questionnaire flow when using the Conditional branching feature, there are restrictions on the new positions that you can move our questions to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot move a Parent question &#039;&#039;below&#039;&#039; any of its Child questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot move a Child question &#039;&#039;above&#039;&#039; its Parent question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot remove those Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct flow of dependent questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 18-04-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those restrictions will show on the Manage questions screen where the Move icon is replaced with a &amp;quot;Forbidden&amp;quot; (Moodle &amp;quot;block&amp;quot;) icon. They will also operate when you are in &amp;quot;Move question&amp;quot; mode, where the Move to here icon/placeholder will not be displayed in the &amp;quot;forbidden&amp;quot; positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit===&lt;br /&gt;
Using the standard Moodle &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon you may edit any question. However, for those questions which have both a Parent question and one or more Child questions, you cannot change their Parent question &amp;amp; Choice, as that might ruin the consequent flow. The only way to change their Parent is to edit their Child question(s) first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 18-12-59.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete===&lt;br /&gt;
You cannot Delete those Page breaks which have been automatically inserted when adding Child questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a Parent question, you will get a warning with the list of its Child questions. If you answer Yes to the warning, the Parent question will be deleted, together with all its Child (and Grand-Child questions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 18-20-29.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting as Required/Not required===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As said above, you would normally set all potential Parent questions as Required. However, there might be cases where you want to leave the respondent the choice to respond or not. If you set a question as Not required, then the usual &amp;quot;No answer&amp;quot; button will be displayed (for Yes/No and Radio Buttons questions). If the respondent does not answer a Parent question, all of its Child questions will be skipped over.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Previewing Questionnaire==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Previewing Questionnaire page is useful for a Questionnaire creator to test it out before making it available in a course. In the case of a Conditional branching questionnaire, the Preview is especially useful as it will mimic the flow that a respondent will see, by selecting the various choices offered by the Parent questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Conditional branching questionnaire is first displayed on the Preview page, only those pages containing &amp;quot;top&amp;quot; parent questions are displayed, as well as pages containing questions that do not have a Parent question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a choice is made in the Parent questions, the Child question(s) corresponding to that choice is/are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screnshots illustrate the various possible sequences that can be displayed. In this example, we have set Question 3 as Non-required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:07-08-2013 18-52-40.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only 2 questions displayed are those with no Parent: Q1 and Q6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:07-08-2013 18-54-36.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon clicking on Q1 &#039;No&#039;, nothing changes in the display, because in our questionnaire we do not have any Child question dependent on that choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 19-07-13.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for a teacher previewing a questionnaire to &amp;quot;Submit the preview&amp;quot;. This will mimic the behaviour of the real Submit questionnaire process: any required question that has not been responded to or any response that does not conform to the question&#039;s conditions will be marked with a Warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 18-56-25.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If all the required questions have been correctly filled in, then upon submitting the preview, a &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; message will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To simulate a new questionnaire flow, you can either click the Preview link in your course&#039;s navigation bar, or the Preview link in the Questionnaire Administration block or the Reset link at the bottom of the Preview window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 22-45-33.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon clicking the &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; radio button in answer to Q1, questions Q2 and Q3 on Page 2, which depend on that Q1 &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; choice are automatically displayed. In &amp;quot;Answer the questions&amp;quot; mode, the respondent would be taken to Page 2 of the questionnaire. Now, if we click on the I bought it new radio button of Q3, Q4 on Page 3 will be displayed, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Individual Responses Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branching questionnaire reports display the same as non-Branching ones. The only notable difference is with the Individual Responses Report, where it is possible to view the particular path that a respondent took through the various conditional questions. Here are 2 examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 23-40-12.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Respondent &amp;quot;Michael Cane&amp;quot; said he owns a red car, bought it new and paid cash for it. He was not presented with Q5, which is displayed between parentheses and greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 23-43-18.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Respondent &amp;quot;John Doe&amp;quot; said he does not own a car. He was not presented with any of the dependent questions Q2 through Q5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questionnaire_branchement_conditionnel]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Viewing_Questionnaire_responses&amp;diff=109340</id>
		<title>Viewing Questionnaire responses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Viewing_Questionnaire_responses&amp;diff=109340"/>
		<updated>2014-01-26T11:15:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Show Non-Respondents */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== All responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Questionnaire Report page, users with the necessary permissions can view a statistical Summary of all the responses given to a Questionnaire instance so far.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Responses display by question type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Numeric====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-34-46.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column 1 displays the number of similar responses. Column 2 displays the responses given. The Total and Average cells are self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Yes/No====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-41-00.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows that out of 5 respondents who responded to this questionnaire, one did not answer this Yes/No question (which was not set as Required). 3 respondents answered Yes (75%) and 1 answered No (25%). Please note that the percentages are calculated on the actual responses, not the total of those who submitted the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-46-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows that 5 our 5 respondents who submitted this questionnaire answered that question (which was Required).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Check boxes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-50-19.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows for instance that the Forum and Glossary activities are favoured by 4 respondents (out of 5 who responded), accounting for 27% of the choices each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Rate question====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-54-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics for Rate questions display 2 tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;top table&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the Average rank for each feature. In this screenshot, the &amp;quot;Formatting your course&amp;quot; feature of Moodle was rated on average 1.4 on the 1 to 4 scale of difficulty, i.e. that feature was rated as between &amp;quot;Very...&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Easy...&amp;quot; to use.&lt;br /&gt;
When creating that Rate question, the following values were entered for each &amp;quot;possible answer&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 4=Very easy to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 3=Easy to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 2=Somewhat difficult to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 1=Difficult to use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is to say that the highest &amp;quot;mark&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; was given to the easiest choice.&lt;br /&gt;
So, the average values (between parentheses) immediately after the average ranks are here the inverse of the average ranks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom table&#039;&#039;&#039; displays for each feature the number and percentage of respondents who selected each choice. For instance, for the &amp;quot;Formatting your course&amp;quot; feature, 3 respondents (60% of respondents to that question) selected the &amp;quot;Very easy to use&amp;quot; choice, and 2 respondents (40% of respondents to that question) selected the &amp;quot;Easy to use&amp;quot; choice. Nobody selected the &amp;quot;Difficult&amp;quot; choices for that feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Essay question====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 19-04-02.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;full name&amp;quot; (i.e. non anonymous), the respondent&#039;s name will be displayed next to their Essay response. Click on the respondent&#039;s name to view their full submission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:16-10-2013 13-45-08.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Visible groups&#039;&#039;, or is set to &#039;&#039;Separate groups&#039;&#039; and the current user has the &#039;&#039;moodle/site:accessallgroups capability&#039;&#039; (in the current context), and groups have been defined in the current course, then the user has access to a dropdown list of groups. This dropdown list enables the user to &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot; the questionnaire responses by groups. If the setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Separate groups&#039;&#039;, then users who do not have the &#039;&#039;moodle/site:accessallgroups&#039;&#039; capability (usually students, or non-editing teachers, etc.) will only be able to view the responses of the group(s) they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;All participants&#039;&#039; includes responses from all the people who answered the questionnaire, including people not belonging to any group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;.- After you have used the dropdown list to select a &amp;quot;set of people&amp;quot; for displaying their responses, the &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot; remains active for the following operations: &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete ALL Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;View by Response&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example, if you selected to display &#039;&#039;&#039;All Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; for group &amp;quot;Sparrows&amp;quot; and then click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete ALL Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; tab link, a confirmation message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete all responses for members of group &amp;quot;Sparrows&amp;quot; and only responses of those participants. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a participant belongs to more than one group, then deleting all the responses for &#039;&#039;one of the Groups&#039;&#039; he belongs to will of course delete his responses from &#039;&#039;all the other groups&#039;&#039; he belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List of responses===&lt;br /&gt;
==== View Individual Responses ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Respondent Type&#039;&#039;&#039; was set as “fullname”, users with the necessary permissions (usually only teachers or tutors) can view each response individually. &lt;br /&gt;
On the List of responses page, each respondent&#039;s name is displayed, in alphabetical order of the family name.&lt;br /&gt;
Upon mouseover, a tooltip displays the submission time-stamp. This is especially useful in case the questionnaire is set to answer more than once and some students have submitted more than one response.&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a respondent&#039;s name to display their submission to the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Individual Responses Navigation====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:05-08-2013 18-46-20.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are viewing a respondent&#039;s individual response, use the navigation bar at the top to go to the Previous (in alphabetical order) or Next response. You can go back to the List of responses page at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Print this Response ====&lt;br /&gt;
Opens printer-friendly window with current Response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Delete this Response ====&lt;br /&gt;
Deletes current response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Order Responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
When displaying All Responses you can order the choices by number of responses (the Average column) for the following 4 types of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single choices radio button &lt;br /&gt;
* single choices drop-down list &lt;br /&gt;
* multiple choices (check boxes) &lt;br /&gt;
* rate questions (including Likert scales). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you arrive on the All Responses page, by default all responses are ordered in the order that the questionnaire creator entered the question choices. You can choose to order them by ascending or descending order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete All Responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Deletes all responses in current questionnaire instance. Can be used to “reset” a questionnaire if you no longer need the current data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Download in text format  ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature enables you to save all the responses of a questionnaire to a text file (CSV). This file can then be imported into a spreadsheet (e.g. MS Excel or Open Office Calc) or a statistical package for further processing the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Options for text download====&lt;br /&gt;
On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039; page you have a set of 2 options which only concern the output of the radio buttons/single answer question type. Here is how these options work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question text: What is your favorite color? Choice: blue, green, red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| selected color &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice codes&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice text&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice codes + Include choice text &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 1&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;blue &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 2&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;green &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 3&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;red &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| No Include box ticked = same as include choice text box ticked &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these output options are over-ridden in case you used the &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option when you created your radio button questions, i.e. the named values will be exported as data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red=the color of blood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue=the color of the sky&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Black=opposite of white &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;What is your favorite color?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the color of blood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the color of the sky&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
opposite of white &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;Irrespective of the Include choice codes/text options selected on the Download in text format page, this will output the values &#039;&#039;&#039;Red&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Blue&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Black&#039;&#039;&#039; to the CSV file.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The CSV file (how to use it)====&lt;br /&gt;
The text format available here is of the so-called CSV (comma separated values) type. However, for more universal use, the &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; (tabulation) separator is used, rather than the comma or semi-colon. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039; button, a window opens, asking you whether you&#039;d like to save the data file or open it. Select &#039;&#039;save&#039;&#039;. The data file is named after the name of the current quiz, however you can save it under a different name. The proposed data file extension is *.txt, but you &#039;&#039;can&#039;&#039; rename it. Note that you &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; rename it with a *.csv extension for import into &#039;&#039;Open Office Calc&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to your external software, and open the file into it. The following operations depend on the software you are using and on a number of other parameters. If you are using a non-ascii language interface in Moodle or you are using the English language but some of your questionnaire questions (or responses) have non-ascii characters in them, then &#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039; (or &#039;&#039;Open Office Calc&#039;&#039;) might be able to &#039;&#039;automatically detect&#039;&#039; that your file is UTF-8 encoded, and decode it accordingly. Please note that if most of your data file is using standard ascii characters and only a very small number of non-ascii characters are present, the automatic detection will not work, and you will have to &#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039; select the UTF-8 encoding in the list provided by your software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the &amp;quot;table&amp;quot; imported into e.g. &#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;, the first line contains the names of all the question fields. This is followed by one line per response. The first 7 fields are as follows (in the English version): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Response&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Submitted on:&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Institution&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Department&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Course&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Group&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| ID&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Full name&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Username&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The submitted_date field contains the date (and time, i.e. hour minutes seconds) when the response was submitted by respondent. For example: 15/09/2007 15:57. Normally you should be able to use Excel cell formatting to display such dates at will, in your own language formatting conventions, including the seconds, and if you wish full day or months names, while retaining the sorting facility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire was set as &amp;quot;anonymous responses&amp;quot;, the ID and Username will be empty and the Full name field will display &amp;quot;Anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Your responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Questionnaire Report page, users with the necessary permissions can view their own responses on the page entitled “Your results”. Usually students will be allowed to view their own responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire&#039;s settings allow more than one response and more than one response have been entered by the current user, then all of the features of the “View All responses” explained above apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not possible to delete individual responses in this “Your responses” view. And the Download as text format is not available to users with the student role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== All your responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
This provides a view of all of a respondent&#039;s responses, on successive dates. This feature may be useful if a questionnaire is used as a kind of portfolio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Show Non-Respondents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the teacher to see students who have not yet responded. A reminder message can be sent to individuals or to everyone that hasn’t submitted responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of &amp;quot;non-respondents&amp;quot; can be filtered by Group (if Groups are enabled for this course and activity).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Save/Resume answers&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to Yes, then the list shows those students who have started but not yet submitted their questionnaire responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-15-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Voir_les_réponses_du_Questionnaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109339</id>
		<title>Editing Questionnaire questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109339"/>
		<updated>2014-01-26T11:14:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Manage questions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing questions==&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Editing Questions&#039;&#039;&#039; page is displayed a drop-down list of the question types available and a list of the questions already created for the current questionnaire instance (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* Using the standard Moodle icons you can change the order of the questions in the questionnaire, edit or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; using the Conditional Branching or the Personality Test features====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;&#039;optionally&#039;&#039; enter a &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; for each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire does not use the &amp;quot;Conditional Branching&amp;quot; or the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; is only used when you export responses to CSV/Excel format. If you never export to CSV, then you needn&#039;t worry about Question names. If you plan to regularly export your questionnaire data to CSV, then you have a choice of two options for question naming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 1: significant names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name &#039;&#039;&#039; box, enter &#039;&#039;meaningful&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;short&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;different&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question names for all of the questions within one questionnaire. In the CSV export file, all those question names will be prefixed with the question&#039;s actual number (= position) in the quiz. Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05_favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| why_use_Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06_why_use_moodle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
user-friendliness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; (rate question with 3 possible answers: Moodle, WebCT and Blackboard) &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;WebCT&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 2: leave the Question Name boxes blank=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each un-named question, CSV export will automatically generate a question name. This is required for table header fields in the CSV and subsequent Excel tables or any statistics package you might be using. The question name generated will be based on the question number in the actual Quiz (excluding &#039;&#039;Section Text&#039;&#039; pseudo-questions, of course) e.g. Q01, Q02, ... Q99. For questions with multiple answers, such as rate-type or Likert type questions, a sub-question number will be generated (Q02_1, Q02_2, Q02_3, etc.). This type of &amp;quot;short-name&amp;quot; naming scheme is advisable for exporting your data to a statistics software. Of course, it&#039;s up to you to have your own system for remembering which abbreviated question name corresponds to which question in your questionnaire!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_3&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is quite possible (but maybe not advisable) to mix the two systems, and have within one questionnaire both named and un-named questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires using the Conditional Branching feature====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a question to be used as the &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; of one or more subsequent questions in your questionnaire, then you &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; name that &amp;quot;parent question&amp;quot;. Only those (radio buttons, dropdown list or yes/no) questions with a &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; will appear in the Parent question dropdown list when adding a new question, as shown on the following screenshots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-26-11.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-34-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response Required===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, response to this question will be required, i.e. the respondent will not be able to submit the questionnaire until this question has been answered. If the respondent tries to submit a questionnaire with unanswered required questions (or, in the case of a questionnaire with more than one section, to go to the next page), a warning message will be displayed with a list of all the missing &#039;&#039;required &#039;&#039;questions in the questionnaire (or on the actual page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default.- &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- When you create new questions in sequence (one after the other), this parameter is carried over to subsequent questions. E.g. if you create question #1 with &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter will be pre-set to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; for question #2, etc. You can of course change this parameter at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;Manage Questions&#039;&#039; section of the Questions editing page, once a question has been created, you can use the green and red dots to switch its Required state, as a shortcut alternative of editing the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-49-48.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parent Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Text===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your question text in this box. The HTML editor is available, which means that you can display not only formatted text but also images or other media in a questionnaire&#039;s questions text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question Types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of question from the drop-down list and click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add selected question type&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===---Page Break---===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to insert page breaks in longish questionnaires. Note that if a page contains questions with required response the respondent will not be allowed to navigate to the next page unless those required responses have been given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire uses the Conditional branching feature, then page breaks will be &#039;&#039;automatically&#039;&#039; inserted when you add &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions. Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct &amp;quot;Conditional branching&amp;quot; flow cannot be moved or deleted. Their Move and Delete icons are disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-58-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Boxes===&lt;br /&gt;
Check boxes allow the user to select multiple answers from a list of options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-58-42.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Options ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Question text: What are your favorite hobbies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible answers:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border: #666666 thin solid&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Watching TV&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Dancing &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Computing&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another hobby:&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-29-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other: &#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# You may provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Check Boxes question, but this might cause problems so it is &#039;&#039;not recommended&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# When a respondent answers a&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Boxes&#039;&#039;&#039; question which has been created as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Min. forced responses &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; Max. forced responses&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters have been used, then a warning message will be displayed if respondent does not check the required number of boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
# Note that, if the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option has been created, then if it is checked by the respondent, it will count in the total of minimum/maximum required check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;that box will be unchecked&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has cheked &#039;&#039;a fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and unckecks that box, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field will be automatically emptied (cool, ain&#039;t it?).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Use the day/month/year format, e.g. for March 14th, 1945: &#039;&#039;&#039;14/3/1945&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted date. The format will depend upon the language currently being used by the questionnaire respondent. For example 4/21/2007 (US); 21/4/2007 (UK); 21-4-2007 (France); etc. An example will be displayed in the questionnaire. If an &amp;quot;impossible&amp;quot; or wrongly formatted date is entered, it will either be re-written or reformatted correctly (if possible) or an error message will be displayed to the respondent. In order for dates to be correctly exported to spreadsheets such as Excel, respondent must enter &#039;&#039;a date in the 1902 to 2037 range&#039;&#039;. If a date outside this range is expected from respondents, then use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Text Box&#039;&#039;&#039; question type instead. The date question type will accept dates consisting only of a month plus a year (e.g. 12/2008 for december 2008) or only a year (e.g. 2008). However, for spreadsheet processing compatibility, such incomplete dates will be automatically transformed to complete dd/mm/yy dates, e.g. 12/2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/&#039;&#039;&#039;12/2008 and 2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/01/&#039;&#039;&#039;2008. You may have to explain this pecularity to your questionnaire users beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dropdown Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no real advantage to using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;&#039; over using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039; except perhaps for longish lists of options, to save screen space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Box===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-01-24_15-37-29.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This question will display a plain text box with &#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea columns&#039;&#039; (or area &#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;) and &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea rows&#039;&#039; (number of text &#039;&#039;lines&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave both x and y to their default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value (or if you set it to &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;), then moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML editor&#039;&#039;&#039; will be displayed with standard height and width (if available in the course/user context &amp;amp; user profile).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Label===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a question but a (short) text which will be displayed to introduce a series of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numeric===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted number. By using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Max. digits allowed &#039;&#039;&#039;and &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of decimal digits &#039;&#039;&#039;parameters you can specify the length and number of decimal places required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Radio Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-03-17.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons Alignment====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-35-04.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
You must fill in one answer per line in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 250&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 243&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 434&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | (optional horizontal display)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 1.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 2.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 3.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Text data export &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 4.Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
red::the color of blood &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; blue::the color of the sky &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; black::opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of blood&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of the sky&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; The &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; red, blue and black will be exported to the columns instead of standard 1, 2 and 3 numbers.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; See [[Viewing_Questionnaire_responses#Download_in_text_format|Download in text format]]. &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 5.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0=Never&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 1=Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 7=Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; How often do you practise a sport? &#039;&#039;&#039;Never &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other:&#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in Example #3 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# It does not make sense to provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Radio Buttons question.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;a warning message will be displayed&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has checked a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and clicks a different radio button in the same question, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field previously entered will be automatically emptied.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example #4 shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - named values as data instead of standard numbers. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each choice will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate (scale 1..5) ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example: ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Rate question now features extra &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons. This is especially useful in Rate questions with a long list of choices.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-23-57.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the respondent forgets to check some radio buttons, upon moving to next page or submitting, the error message will be completed with highlighting of the &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-26-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-26-37.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Number of scale items ====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;is the &#039;&#039;number of items&#039;&#039; to be used in your rate scale. You would normally use a value of 3 to 5. Default value: &#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Type of rate scale ====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039;&#039; (default value)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; N/A columns &#039;&#039;&#039; : Choose this if you want an &#039;&#039;&#039;N/A&#039;&#039;&#039; column to be added to the right of your Rate scale items columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this if you want &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;to prevent duplicate choices in each degree &#039;&#039;&#039;column&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
** This is useful if you want the respondent to rank a number of items on a 1 to n scale and to force each rank to be unique. Example: order items A, B and C in order of preference will accept: &#039;&#039;A1, B3 and C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A3, B2 and C1&#039;&#039;, but &#039;&#039;it will not be possible&#039;&#039; for the respondent to enter: &#039;&#039;A1, B1, C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A1, B2, C2,&#039;&#039; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** Used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]], this &#039;&#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039; option can also be useful if you want the respondent to match items with named degrees, e.g. the colors &#039;&#039;red, blue, yellow&#039;&#039; with a set of physiological responses: &#039;&#039;excitement, tranquillity, concentration&#039;&#039; where &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; color can only match &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; physiological response.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this to create a question of the &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s semantic differential] type. This parameter must be used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
Examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 1 Rate&#039;&#039;&#039; (single line) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter a blank space or a short &amp;quot;label&amp;quot;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 columns numbered 1...5);&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Normal&#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013_13-53-43.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2 Rate &#039;&#039;&#039; (several lines)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Desire2Learn&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Sakai&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 columns numbered 1...4)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; N/A column &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-50-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2a Rate (&amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot;) &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option makes it impossible to click more than one radio button per column; it is thus equivalent to an &amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot; question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3 (3 columns numbered 1...3) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-59-31.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3 Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here)&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-04-00.jpg|800px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3b Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
formatting::Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
layout::Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
clicks::Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
addcontent::Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
appearance::Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
navigation::Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If the choice options text is fairly long, you may use shorter &amp;quot;labels&amp;quot; immediately followed by two colons (::).&lt;br /&gt;
The labels &amp;quot;formatting&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;layout&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;clicks&amp;quot; etc. will be saved to the columns headings in the Download as text format operation, instead of the longer labels which will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039; that in former versions of Questionnaire the separator between &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;options text&amp;quot; used to be the equal sign (=). In Questionnaire 2.5 and later, please use two colons (::) as a separator.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 4 [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s Semantic differential] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1=--&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 2=-&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=±&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 4=+&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=++&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; weak|strong&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cold|warm&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cowardly|brave&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Note.- &#039;&#039;&#039; To separate the pairs of words you must use a pipe character &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-06-54.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;anchor_one&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this question type you have two display options. The default option displays the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Likert_scale Likert] scale degrees as numbers (1...5). If you prefer to have named degrees instead of numbers, you&#039;ll have to enter those names in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; list (see &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; above). On each line of &amp;quot;possible answers&amp;quot; enter the degree number, &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;=&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the name you want to give to that degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each named degree will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions_2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;&#039;the number of named degrees&#039;&#039; in the possible answers list &#039;&#039;is different from the number determined by the value you entered&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of scale items&#039;&#039;&#039; field, this will be automatically adjusted when you save the question. If you decide to use named degrees for your Likert scale, it is recommended (but not obligatory) to start your list of possible answers with the named degrees, and then to enter the various &#039;&#039;items&#039;&#039; to be scaled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example #3b shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - shorter label instead of the longer text values. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option. Please note that the example is provided here for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question sub-type but it works for all Rate question sub-types except Osgood which requires short left and right options anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Text Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Text Box question type, enter the Input Box length and the Maximum text length of text to be entered by respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values are 20 characters for the Input Box width and 25 characters for the maximum length of text entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Yes/No===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage questions&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Questions page, you can conduct a number of operations on a Questionnaire&#039;s questions. Normally you should never add questions or delete questions in a questionnaire that is live in a moodle course, and which some students may have already responded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Move a question to a different position in the Questionnaire. If your questionnaire contains some &amp;quot;conditional branching&amp;quot; questions, you may not be able to move some of the parent or child questions to some positions which would ruin the branching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Edit a question, but again, be extra careful when editing questions once students have started to complete a questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a child or parent question (in a Conditional branching questionnaire), you will be warned of the possible consequences of those deletions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the Green or Red dots, you can switch the &amp;quot;Response required&amp;quot; status of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the numbers in front of each question in this interface are &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; the question numbers that will be displayed when answering the questionnaire. Here, these numbers indicate the question&#039;s position, and even non-real questions such as Labels and Page Breaks have a position number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter_des_questions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Conditional_branching&amp;diff=109321</id>
		<title>Questionnaire Conditional branching</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Conditional_branching&amp;diff=109321"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T16:46:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Previewing Questionnaire */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
Conditional branching (or Skip logic) is a feature that changes what question or page a respondent sees next based on how they answer the current question. Conditional branching creates a custom path through the survey that varies based on a respondent’s answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organization===&lt;br /&gt;
In the Questionnaire plugin, the Conditional branching path is organized through &#039;&#039;pages&#039;&#039;, containing one or more &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions depending on a &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use the Conditional branching feature in a Questionnaire, when you create or edit the questionnaire, in the Response options section of the settings, you must set the &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow branching questions&#039;&#039;&#039; option to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. Please note that this option is set to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A simple example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The flow we want to obtain===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 1&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 1 Do you own a car? Yes/No.&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer Yes -&amp;gt; go to page 2&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer No -&amp;gt; go to page 5 (i.e. skip over irrelevant questions in pages 2 through 4)&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 2&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 2: What is the color of your car?&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 3: Did you buy it new or second-hand?&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer new -&amp;gt; go to page 3&lt;br /&gt;
***Answer second-hand -&amp;gt; go to page 4&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 3&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 4: Did you pay your new car cash or did you get a bank loan?&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 4&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 5: Did you buy your second-hand car from a garage or directly from its previous owner?&lt;br /&gt;
*Page 5&lt;br /&gt;
**Question 6: Do you sometimes use public transport to go to work?&lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Procedure to obtain that flow===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a Yes/No question.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;own car&#039;&#039;. Note that you &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; give your question a name, as this name will be used later on in the Questionnaire to build the list of available Parent questions. Please keep this name as short as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. Since you plan to use question Q1 as a Parent question, it would not make sense to set it as non-required.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Do you own a car?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q1. No Page break will be inserted at this stage because you have not yet used a Parent question to create one or more Child questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q2 as a Text Box question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; (depending on what you want to do with that question&#039;s answers later on).&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;own car-&amp;gt;Yes&#039;&#039;. The Parent question (Q1) option offers 2 choices, since it is a Yes/No question.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;What is the colour of your car?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q2. Upon saving Child question Q2 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between the Parent question Q1 and its Child question Q2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q3 as a Radio Buttons (or Dropdown Box) question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;car status&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. We are giving question Q3 a name and setting it as Required because we plan to use it as a Parent question.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: own car-&amp;gt;Yes&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Did you buy it new or second-hand?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;new::I bought it new&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;used::I bought it second-hand&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
**Please note that in the Possible answers field we are using the &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; feature. You should use this feature if the full text of your Possible answers choices is fairly long.&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q3. Upon saving Child question Q3 you notice that no Page break has been inserted. This is because both Q2 and Q3 are Child questions of the same Parent question Q1 and thus will be displayed on the same page of the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q4 as a Radio Buttons question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: car status-&amp;gt;new&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**Please note that the list of potential Parent question choices displays the &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; that we entered for the Possible answers in Q3, instead of the full text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How did you pay for your new car?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I paid cash&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I got a bank loan&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q4. Upon saving Child question Q4 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between Parent question Q3 and its Child question Q4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q5 as a Radio Buttons question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: car status-&amp;gt;used&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Where did you buy your second-hand car? &lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I bought it from a garage&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;I bought it directly from its previous owner&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q5. Upon saving Child question Q5 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between Child question Q4 and Child question Q5 because these two question do not have the same Parent question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q6 as YES/NO question type.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: optional&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Question&#039;&#039;&#039;: None. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Question 6 is not dependent on any of the previous questions, and it will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent regardless of their previous answers.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do you sometimes use public transport to go to work?&lt;br /&gt;
**Save Q6. Upon saving question Q6 you notice that a Page break has been automatically inserted between Child question Q5 and question Q6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now continue creating questions normally, until you want to use Conditional branching again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is what your Manage questions section will look like after you have created those first 6 questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 17-49-53.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operations on Conditional branching questions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Move===&lt;br /&gt;
By using the standard Moodle &amp;quot;Move&amp;quot; icon you can move your questionnaire questions to different positions. However, due to the special nature of the questionnaire flow when using the Conditional branching feature, there are restrictions on the new positions that you can move our questions to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot move a Parent question &#039;&#039;below&#039;&#039; any of its Child questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot move a Child question &#039;&#039;above&#039;&#039; its Parent question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot remove those Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct flow of dependent questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 18-04-16.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those restrictions will show on the Manage questions screen where the Move icon is replaced with a &amp;quot;Forbidden&amp;quot; (Moodle &amp;quot;block&amp;quot;) icon. They will also operate when you are in &amp;quot;Move question&amp;quot; mode, where the Move to here icon/placeholder will not be displayed in the &amp;quot;forbidden&amp;quot; positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit===&lt;br /&gt;
Using the standard Moodle &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon you may edit any question. However, for those questions which have both a Parent question and one or more Child questions, you cannot change their Parent question &amp;amp; Choice, as that might ruin the consequent flow. The only way to change their Parent is to edit their Child question(s) first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 18-12-59.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete===&lt;br /&gt;
You cannot Delete those Page breaks which have been automatically inserted when adding Child questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a Parent question, you will get a warning with the list of its Child questions. If you answer Yes to the warning, the Parent question will be deleted, together with all its Child (and Grand-Child questions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:07-08-2013 18-20-29.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting as Required/Not required===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As said above, you would normally set all potential Parent questions as Required. However, there might be cases where you want to leave the respondent the choice to respond or not. If you set a question as Not required, then the usual &amp;quot;No answer&amp;quot; button will be displayed (for Yes/No and Radio Buttons questions). If the respondent does not answer a Parent question, all of its Child questions will be skipped over.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Previewing Questionnaire==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Previewing Questionnaire page is useful for a Questionnaire creator to test it out before making it available in a course. In the case of a Conditional branching questionnaire, the Preview is especially useful as it will mimic the flow that a respondent will see, by selecting the various choices offered by the Parent questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Conditional branching questionnaire is first displayed on the Preview page, only those pages containing &amp;quot;top&amp;quot; parent questions are displayed, as well as pages containing questions that do not have a Parent question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a choice is made in the Parent questions, the Child question(s) corresponding to that choice is/are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screnshots illustrate the various possible sequences that can be displayed. In this example, we have set Question 3 as Non-required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:07-08-2013 18-52-40.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only 2 questions displayed are those with no Parent: Q1 and Q6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:07-08-2013 18-54-36.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon clicking on Q1 &#039;No&#039;, nothing changes in the display, because in our questionnaire we do not have any Child question dependent on that choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 19-07-13.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for a teacher previewing a questionnaire to &amp;quot;Submit the preview&amp;quot;. This will mimic the behaviour of the real Submit questionnaire process: any required question that has not been responded to or any response that does not conform to the question&#039;s conditions will be marked with a Warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 18-56-25.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If all the required questions have been correctly filled in, then upon submitting the preview, a &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; message will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To simulate a new questionnaire flow, you can either click the Preview link in your course&#039;s navigation bar, or the Preview link in the Questionnaire Administration block or the Reset link at the bottom of the Preview window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 22-45-33.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon clicking the &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; radio button in answer to Q1, questions Q2 and Q3 on Page 2, which depend on that Q1 &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; choice are automatically displayed. In &amp;quot;Answer the questions&amp;quot; mode, the respondent would be taken to Page 2 of the questionnaire. Now, if we click on the I bought it new radio button of Q3, Q4 on Page 3 will be displayed, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Individual Responses Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branching questionnaire reports display the same as non-Branching ones. The only notable difference is with the Individual Responses Report, where it is possible to view the particular path that a respondent took through the various conditional questions. Here are 2 examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 23-40-12.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Respondent &amp;quot;Michael Cane&amp;quot; said he owns a red car, bought it new and paid cash for it. He was not presented with Q5, which is displayed between parentheses and greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:08-08-2013 23-43-18.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Respondent &amp;quot;John Doe&amp;quot; said he does not own a car. He was not presented with any of the dependent questions Q2 through Q5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Ramificación condicional de un cuestionario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Viewing_Questionnaire_responses&amp;diff=109286</id>
		<title>Viewing Questionnaire responses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Viewing_Questionnaire_responses&amp;diff=109286"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T22:49:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Group filtering */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== All responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Questionnaire Report page, users with the necessary permissions can view a statistical Summary of all the responses given to a Questionnaire instance so far.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Responses display by question type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Numeric====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-34-46.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column 1 displays the number of similar responses. Column 2 displays the responses given. The Total and Average cells are self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Yes/No====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-41-00.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows that out of 5 respondents who responded to this questionnaire, one did not answer this Yes/No question (which was not set as Required). 3 respondents answered Yes (75%) and 1 answered No (25%). Please note that the percentages are calculated on the actual responses, not the total of those who submitted the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-46-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows that 5 our 5 respondents who submitted this questionnaire answered that question (which was Required).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Check boxes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-50-19.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screenshot shows for instance that the Forum and Glossary activities are favoured by 4 respondents (out of 5 who responded), accounting for 27% of the choices each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Rate question====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-54-34.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics for Rate questions display 2 tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;top table&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the Average rank for each feature. In this screenshot, the &amp;quot;Formatting your course&amp;quot; feature of Moodle was rated on average 1.4 on the 1 to 4 scale of difficulty, i.e. that feature was rated as between &amp;quot;Very...&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Easy...&amp;quot; to use.&lt;br /&gt;
When creating that Rate question, the following values were entered for each &amp;quot;possible answer&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 4=Very easy to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 3=Easy to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 2=Somewhat difficult to use&lt;br /&gt;
* 1=Difficult to use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is to say that the highest &amp;quot;mark&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; was given to the easiest choice.&lt;br /&gt;
So, the average values (between parentheses) immediately after the average ranks are here the inverse of the average ranks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom table&#039;&#039;&#039; displays for each feature the number and percentage of respondents who selected each choice. For instance, for the &amp;quot;Formatting your course&amp;quot; feature, 3 respondents (60% of respondents to that question) selected the &amp;quot;Very easy to use&amp;quot; choice, and 2 respondents (40% of respondents to that question) selected the &amp;quot;Easy to use&amp;quot; choice. Nobody selected the &amp;quot;Difficult&amp;quot; choices for that feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Essay question====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 19-04-02.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;full name&amp;quot; (i.e. non anonymous), the respondent&#039;s name will be displayed next to their Essay response. Click on the respondent&#039;s name to view their full submission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:16-10-2013 13-45-08.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Visible groups&#039;&#039;, or is set to &#039;&#039;Separate groups&#039;&#039; and the current user has the &#039;&#039;moodle/site:accessallgroups capability&#039;&#039; (in the current context), and groups have been defined in the current course, then the user has access to a dropdown list of groups. This dropdown list enables the user to &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot; the questionnaire responses by groups. If the setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Separate groups&#039;&#039;, then users who do not have the &#039;&#039;moodle/site:accessallgroups&#039;&#039; capability (usually students, or non-editing teachers, etc.) will only be able to view the responses of the group(s) they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;All participants&#039;&#039; includes responses from all the people who answered the questionnaire, including people not belonging to any group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;.- After you have used the dropdown list to select a &amp;quot;set of people&amp;quot; for displaying their responses, the &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot; remains active for the following operations: &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete ALL Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;View by Response&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example, if you selected to display &#039;&#039;&#039;All Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; for group &amp;quot;Sparrows&amp;quot; and then click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete ALL Responses&#039;&#039;&#039; tab link, a confirmation message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete all responses for members of group &amp;quot;Sparrows&amp;quot; and only responses of those participants. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a participant belongs to more than one group, then deleting all the responses for &#039;&#039;one of the Groups&#039;&#039; he belongs to will of course delete his responses from &#039;&#039;all the other groups&#039;&#039; he belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List of responses===&lt;br /&gt;
==== View Individual Responses ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Respondent Type&#039;&#039;&#039; was set as “fullname”, users with the necessary permissions (usually only teachers or tutors) can view each response individually. &lt;br /&gt;
On the List of responses page, each respondent&#039;s name is displayed, in alphabetical order of the family name.&lt;br /&gt;
Upon mouseover, a tooltip displays the submission time-stamp. This is especially useful in case the questionnaire is set to answer more than once and some students have submitted more than one response.&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a respondent&#039;s name to display their submission to the questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Individual Responses Navigation====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:05-08-2013 18-46-20.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are viewing a respondent&#039;s individual response, use the navigation bar at the top to go to the Previous (in alphabetical order) or Next response. You can go back to the List of responses page at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Print this Response ====&lt;br /&gt;
Opens printer-friendly window with current Response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Delete this Response ====&lt;br /&gt;
Deletes current response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Order Responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
When displaying All Responses you can order the choices by number of responses (the Average column) for the following 4 types of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single choices radio button &lt;br /&gt;
* single choices drop-down list &lt;br /&gt;
* multiple choices (check boxes) &lt;br /&gt;
* rate questions (including Likert scales). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you arrive on the All Responses page, by default all responses are ordered in the order that the questionnaire creator entered the question choices. You can choose to order them by ascending or descending order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete All Responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Deletes all responses in current questionnaire instance. Can be used to “reset” a questionnaire if you no longer need the current data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Download in text format  ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature enables you to save all the responses of a questionnaire to a text file (CSV). This file can then be imported into a spreadsheet (e.g. MS Excel or Open Office Calc) or a statistical package for further processing the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Options for text download====&lt;br /&gt;
On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039; page you have a set of 2 options which only concern the output of the radio buttons/single answer question type. Here is how these options work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question text: What is your favorite color? Choice: blue, green, red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| selected color &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice codes&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice text&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| Include choice codes + Include choice text &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 1&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;blue &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 2&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;green &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| 3&amp;amp;nbsp;:&amp;amp;nbsp;red &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| No Include box ticked = same as include choice text box ticked &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| blue&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| green&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.049cm;&amp;quot;| red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these output options are over-ridden in case you used the &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option when you created your radio button questions, i.e. the named values will be exported as data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red=the color of blood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue=the color of the sky&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Black=opposite of white &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;What is your favorite color?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the color of blood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the color of the sky&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
opposite of white &lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width:33%; border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.132cm;&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;Irrespective of the Include choice codes/text options selected on the Download in text format page, this will output the values &#039;&#039;&#039;Red&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Blue&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Black&#039;&#039;&#039; to the CSV file.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The CSV file (how to use it)====&lt;br /&gt;
The text format available here is of the so-called CSV (comma separated values) type. However, for more universal use, the &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; (tabulation) separator is used, rather than the comma or semi-colon. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download in text format&#039;&#039;&#039; button, a window opens, asking you whether you&#039;d like to save the data file or open it. Select &#039;&#039;save&#039;&#039;. The data file is named after the name of the current quiz, however you can save it under a different name. The proposed data file extension is *.txt, but you &#039;&#039;can&#039;&#039; rename it. Note that you &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; rename it with a *.csv extension for import into &#039;&#039;Open Office Calc&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to your external software, and open the file into it. The following operations depend on the software you are using and on a number of other parameters. If you are using a non-ascii language interface in Moodle or you are using the English language but some of your questionnaire questions (or responses) have non-ascii characters in them, then &#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039; (or &#039;&#039;Open Office Calc&#039;&#039;) might be able to &#039;&#039;automatically detect&#039;&#039; that your file is UTF-8 encoded, and decode it accordingly. Please note that if most of your data file is using standard ascii characters and only a very small number of non-ascii characters are present, the automatic detection will not work, and you will have to &#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039; select the UTF-8 encoding in the list provided by your software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the &amp;quot;table&amp;quot; imported into e.g. &#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;, the first line contains the names of all the question fields. This is followed by one line per response. The first 7 fields are as follows (in the English version): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-spacing:0;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Response&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Submitted on:&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Institution&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Department&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Course&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Group&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| ID&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-top:0.092cm double #808080;border-bottom:0.092cm double #808080;border-left:0.092cm double #808080;border-right:none;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Full name&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border:0.092cm double #808080;padding:0.079cm;&amp;quot;| Username&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The submitted_date field contains the date (and time, i.e. hour minutes seconds) when the response was submitted by respondent. For example: 15/09/2007 15:57. Normally you should be able to use Excel cell formatting to display such dates at will, in your own language formatting conventions, including the seconds, and if you wish full day or months names, while retaining the sorting facility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire was set as &amp;quot;anonymous responses&amp;quot;, the ID and Username will be empty and the Full name field will display &amp;quot;Anonymous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Your responses ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Questionnaire Report page, users with the necessary permissions can view their own responses on the page entitled “Your results”. Usually students will be allowed to view their own responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire&#039;s settings allow more than one response and more than one response have been entered by the current user, then all of the features of the “View All responses” explained above apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not possible to delete individual responses in this “Your responses” view. And the Download as text format is not available to users with the student role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== All your responses ===&lt;br /&gt;
This provides a view of all of a respondent&#039;s responses, on successive dates. This feature may be useful if a questionnaire is used as a kind of portfolio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Show Non-Respondents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the teacher to see students who have not yet responded. A reminder message can be sent to individuals or to everyone that hasn’t submitted responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of &amp;quot;non-respondents&amp;quot; can be filtered by Group (if Groups are enabled for this course and activity).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Save/Resume answers&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to Yes, then the list shows those students who have started but not yet submitted their questionnaire responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 16-15-58.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109262</id>
		<title>Editing Questionnaire questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109262"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T14:41:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Question editing interface */ Updated to current interface&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing questions==&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Editing Questions&#039;&#039;&#039; page is displayed a drop-down list of the question types available and a list of the questions already created for the current questionnaire instance (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* Using the standard Moodle icons you can change the order of the questions in the questionnaire, edit or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; using the Conditional Branching or the Personality Test features====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;&#039;optionally&#039;&#039; enter a &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; for each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire does not use the &amp;quot;Conditional Branching&amp;quot; or the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; is only used when you export responses to CSV/Excel format. If you never export to CSV, then you needn&#039;t worry about Question names. If you plan to regularly export your questionnaire data to CSV, then you have a choice of two options for question naming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 1: significant names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name &#039;&#039;&#039; box, enter &#039;&#039;meaningful&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;short&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;different&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question names for all of the questions within one questionnaire. In the CSV export file, all those question names will be prefixed with the question&#039;s actual number (= position) in the quiz. Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05_favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| why_use_Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06_why_use_moodle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
user-friendliness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; (rate question with 3 possible answers: Moodle, WebCT and Blackboard) &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;WebCT&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 2: leave the Question Name boxes blank=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each un-named question, CSV export will automatically generate a question name. This is required for table header fields in the CSV and subsequent Excel tables or any statistics package you might be using. The question name generated will be based on the question number in the actual Quiz (excluding &#039;&#039;Section Text&#039;&#039; pseudo-questions, of course) e.g. Q01, Q02, ... Q99. For questions with multiple answers, such as rate-type or Likert type questions, a sub-question number will be generated (Q02_1, Q02_2, Q02_3, etc.). This type of &amp;quot;short-name&amp;quot; naming scheme is advisable for exporting your data to a statistics software. Of course, it&#039;s up to you to have your own system for remembering which abbreviated question name corresponds to which question in your questionnaire!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_3&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is quite possible (but maybe not advisable) to mix the two systems, and have within one questionnaire both named and un-named questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires using the Conditional Branching feature====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a question to be used as the &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; of one or more subsequent questions in your questionnaire, then you &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; name that &amp;quot;parent question&amp;quot;. Only those (radio buttons, dropdown list or yes/no) questions with a &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; will appear in the Parent question dropdown list when adding a new question, as shown on the following screenshots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-26-11.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-34-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response Required===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, response to this question will be required, i.e. the respondent will not be able to submit the questionnaire until this question has been answered. If the respondent tries to submit a questionnaire with unanswered required questions (or, in the case of a questionnaire with more than one section, to go to the next page), a warning message will be displayed with a list of all the missing &#039;&#039;required &#039;&#039;questions in the questionnaire (or on the actual page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default.- &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- When you create new questions in sequence (one after the other), this parameter is carried over to subsequent questions. E.g. if you create question #1 with &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter will be pre-set to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; for question #2, etc. You can of course change this parameter at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;Manage Questions&#039;&#039; section of the Questions editing page, once a question has been created, you can use the green and red dots to switch its Required state, as a shortcut alternative of editing the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-49-48.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parent Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Text===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your question text in this box. The HTML editor is available, which means that you can display not only formatted text but also images or other media in a questionnaire&#039;s questions text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question Types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of question from the drop-down list and click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add selected question type&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===---Page Break---===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to insert page breaks in longish questionnaires. Note that if a page contains questions with required response the respondent will not be allowed to navigate to the next page unless those required responses have been given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire uses the Conditional branching feature, then page breaks will be &#039;&#039;automatically&#039;&#039; inserted when you add &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions. Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct &amp;quot;Conditional branching&amp;quot; flow cannot be moved or deleted. Their Move and Delete icons are disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-58-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Boxes===&lt;br /&gt;
Check boxes allow the user to select multiple answers from a list of options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-58-42.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Options ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Question text: What are your favorite hobbies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible answers:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border: #666666 thin solid&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Watching TV&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Dancing &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Computing&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another hobby:&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-29-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other: &#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# You may provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Check Boxes question, but this might cause problems so it is &#039;&#039;not recommended&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# When a respondent answers a&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Boxes&#039;&#039;&#039; question which has been created as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Min. forced responses &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; Max. forced responses&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters have been used, then a warning message will be displayed if respondent does not check the required number of boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
# Note that, if the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option has been created, then if it is checked by the respondent, it will count in the total of minimum/maximum required check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;that box will be unchecked&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has cheked &#039;&#039;a fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and unckecks that box, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field will be automatically emptied (cool, ain&#039;t it?).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Use the day/month/year format, e.g. for March 14th, 1945: &#039;&#039;&#039;14/3/1945&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted date. The format will depend upon the language currently being used by the questionnaire respondent. For example 4/21/2007 (US); 21/4/2007 (UK); 21-4-2007 (France); etc. An example will be displayed in the questionnaire. If an &amp;quot;impossible&amp;quot; or wrongly formatted date is entered, it will either be re-written or reformatted correctly (if possible) or an error message will be displayed to the respondent. In order for dates to be correctly exported to spreadsheets such as Excel, respondent must enter &#039;&#039;a date in the 1902 to 2037 range&#039;&#039;. If a date outside this range is expected from respondents, then use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Text Box&#039;&#039;&#039; question type instead. The date question type will accept dates consisting only of a month plus a year (e.g. 12/2008 for december 2008) or only a year (e.g. 2008). However, for spreadsheet processing compatibility, such incomplete dates will be automatically transformed to complete dd/mm/yy dates, e.g. 12/2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/&#039;&#039;&#039;12/2008 and 2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/01/&#039;&#039;&#039;2008. You may have to explain this pecularity to your questionnaire users beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dropdown Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no real advantage to using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;&#039; over using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039; except perhaps for longish lists of options, to save screen space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Box===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2014-01-24_15-37-29.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This question will display a plain text box with &#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea columns&#039;&#039; (or area &#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;) and &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea rows&#039;&#039; (number of text &#039;&#039;lines&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave both x and y to their default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value (or if you set it to &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;), then moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML editor&#039;&#039;&#039; will be displayed with standard height and width (if available in the course/user context &amp;amp; user profile).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Label===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a question but a (short) text which will be displayed to introduce a series of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numeric===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted number. By using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Max. digits allowed &#039;&#039;&#039;and &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of decimal digits &#039;&#039;&#039;parameters you can specify the length and number of decimal places required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Radio Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-03-17.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons Alignment====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-35-04.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
You must fill in one answer per line in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 250&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 243&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 434&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | (optional horizontal display)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 1.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 2.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 3.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Text data export &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 4.Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
red::the color of blood &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; blue::the color of the sky &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; black::opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of blood&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of the sky&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; The &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; red, blue and black will be exported to the columns instead of standard 1, 2 and 3 numbers.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; See [[Viewing_Questionnaire_responses#Download_in_text_format|Download in text format]]. &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 5.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0=Never&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 1=Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 7=Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; How often do you practise a sport? &#039;&#039;&#039;Never &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other:&#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in Example #3 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# It does not make sense to provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Radio Buttons question.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;a warning message will be displayed&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has checked a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and clicks a different radio button in the same question, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field previously entered will be automatically emptied.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example #4 shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - named values as data instead of standard numbers. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each choice will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate (scale 1..5) ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example: ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Rate question now features extra &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons. This is especially useful in Rate questions with a long list of choices.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-23-57.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the respondent forgets to check some radio buttons, upon moving to next page or submitting, the error message will be completed with highlighting of the &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-26-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-26-37.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Number of scale items ====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;is the &#039;&#039;number of items&#039;&#039; to be used in your rate scale. You would normally use a value of 3 to 5. Default value: &#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Type of rate scale ====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039;&#039; (default value)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; N/A columns &#039;&#039;&#039; : Choose this if you want an &#039;&#039;&#039;N/A&#039;&#039;&#039; column to be added to the right of your Rate scale items columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this if you want &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;to prevent duplicate choices in each degree &#039;&#039;&#039;column&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
** This is useful if you want the respondent to rank a number of items on a 1 to n scale and to force each rank to be unique. Example: order items A, B and C in order of preference will accept: &#039;&#039;A1, B3 and C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A3, B2 and C1&#039;&#039;, but &#039;&#039;it will not be possible&#039;&#039; for the respondent to enter: &#039;&#039;A1, B1, C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A1, B2, C2,&#039;&#039; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** Used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]], this &#039;&#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039; option can also be useful if you want the respondent to match items with named degrees, e.g. the colors &#039;&#039;red, blue, yellow&#039;&#039; with a set of physiological responses: &#039;&#039;excitement, tranquillity, concentration&#039;&#039; where &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; color can only match &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; physiological response.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this to create a question of the &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s semantic differential] type. This parameter must be used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
Examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 1 Rate&#039;&#039;&#039; (single line) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter a blank space or a short &amp;quot;label&amp;quot;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 columns numbered 1...5);&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Normal&#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013_13-53-43.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2 Rate &#039;&#039;&#039; (several lines)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Desire2Learn&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Sakai&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 columns numbered 1...4)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; N/A column &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-50-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2a Rate (&amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot;) &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option makes it impossible to click more than one radio button per column; it is thus equivalent to an &amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot; question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3 (3 columns numbered 1...3) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-59-31.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3 Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here)&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-04-00.jpg|800px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3b Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
formatting::Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
layout::Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
clicks::Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
addcontent::Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
appearance::Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
navigation::Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If the choice options text is fairly long, you may use shorter &amp;quot;labels&amp;quot; immediately followed by two colons (::).&lt;br /&gt;
The labels &amp;quot;formatting&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;layout&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;clicks&amp;quot; etc. will be saved to the columns headings in the Download as text format operation, instead of the longer labels which will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039; that in former versions of Questionnaire the separator between &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;options text&amp;quot; used to be the equal sign (=). In Questionnaire 2.5 and later, please use two colons (::) as a separator.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 4 [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s Semantic differential] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1=--&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 2=-&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=±&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 4=+&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=++&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; weak|strong&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cold|warm&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cowardly|brave&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Note.- &#039;&#039;&#039; To separate the pairs of words you must use a pipe character &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-06-54.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;anchor_one&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this question type you have two display options. The default option displays the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Likert_scale Likert] scale degrees as numbers (1...5). If you prefer to have named degrees instead of numbers, you&#039;ll have to enter those names in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; list (see &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; above). On each line of &amp;quot;possible answers&amp;quot; enter the degree number, &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;=&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the name you want to give to that degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each named degree will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions_2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;&#039;the number of named degrees&#039;&#039; in the possible answers list &#039;&#039;is different from the number determined by the value you entered&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of scale items&#039;&#039;&#039; field, this will be automatically adjusted when you save the question. If you decide to use named degrees for your Likert scale, it is recommended (but not obligatory) to start your list of possible answers with the named degrees, and then to enter the various &#039;&#039;items&#039;&#039; to be scaled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example #3b shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - shorter label instead of the longer text values. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option. Please note that the example is provided here for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question sub-type but it works for all Rate question sub-types except Osgood which requires short left and right options anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Text Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Text Box question type, enter the Input Box length and the Maximum text length of text to be entered by respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values are 20 characters for the Input Box width and 25 characters for the maximum length of text entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Yes/No===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage questions&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Questions page, you can conduct a number of operations on a Questionnaire&#039;s questions. Normally you should never add questions or delete questions in a questionnaire that is live in a moodle course, and which some students may have already responded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Move a question to a different position in the Questionnaire. If your questionnaire contains some &amp;quot;conditional branching&amp;quot; questions, you may not be able to move some of the parent or child questions to some positions which would ruin the branching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Edit a question, but again, be extra careful when editing questions once students have started to complete a questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a child or parent question (in a Conditional branching questionnaire), you will be warned of the possible consequences of those deletions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the Green or Red dots, you can switch the &amp;quot;Response required&amp;quot; status of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the numbers in front of each question in this interface are &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; the question numbers that will be displayed when answering the questionnaire. Here, these numbers indicate the question&#039;s position, and even non-real questions such as Labels and Page Breaks have a position number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editando preguntas de un cuestionario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-01-24_15-37-29.jpg&amp;diff=109261</id>
		<title>File:2014-01-24 15-37-29.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:2014-01-24_15-37-29.jpg&amp;diff=109261"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T14:40:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109255</id>
		<title>Editing Questionnaire questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109255"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T11:06:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Check Boxes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing questions==&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Editing Questions&#039;&#039;&#039; page is displayed a drop-down list of the question types available and a list of the questions already created for the current questionnaire instance (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* Using the standard Moodle icons you can change the order of the questions in the questionnaire, edit or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; using the Conditional Branching or the Personality Test features====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;&#039;optionally&#039;&#039; enter a &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; for each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire does not use the &amp;quot;Conditional Branching&amp;quot; or the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; is only used when you export responses to CSV/Excel format. If you never export to CSV, then you needn&#039;t worry about Question names. If you plan to regularly export your questionnaire data to CSV, then you have a choice of two options for question naming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 1: significant names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name &#039;&#039;&#039; box, enter &#039;&#039;meaningful&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;short&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;different&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question names for all of the questions within one questionnaire. In the CSV export file, all those question names will be prefixed with the question&#039;s actual number (= position) in the quiz. Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05_favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| why_use_Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06_why_use_moodle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
user-friendliness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; (rate question with 3 possible answers: Moodle, WebCT and Blackboard) &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;WebCT&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 2: leave the Question Name boxes blank=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each un-named question, CSV export will automatically generate a question name. This is required for table header fields in the CSV and subsequent Excel tables or any statistics package you might be using. The question name generated will be based on the question number in the actual Quiz (excluding &#039;&#039;Section Text&#039;&#039; pseudo-questions, of course) e.g. Q01, Q02, ... Q99. For questions with multiple answers, such as rate-type or Likert type questions, a sub-question number will be generated (Q02_1, Q02_2, Q02_3, etc.). This type of &amp;quot;short-name&amp;quot; naming scheme is advisable for exporting your data to a statistics software. Of course, it&#039;s up to you to have your own system for remembering which abbreviated question name corresponds to which question in your questionnaire!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_3&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is quite possible (but maybe not advisable) to mix the two systems, and have within one questionnaire both named and un-named questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires using the Conditional Branching feature====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a question to be used as the &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; of one or more subsequent questions in your questionnaire, then you &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; name that &amp;quot;parent question&amp;quot;. Only those (radio buttons, dropdown list or yes/no) questions with a &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; will appear in the Parent question dropdown list when adding a new question, as shown on the following screenshots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-26-11.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-34-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response Required===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, response to this question will be required, i.e. the respondent will not be able to submit the questionnaire until this question has been answered. If the respondent tries to submit a questionnaire with unanswered required questions (or, in the case of a questionnaire with more than one section, to go to the next page), a warning message will be displayed with a list of all the missing &#039;&#039;required &#039;&#039;questions in the questionnaire (or on the actual page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default.- &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- When you create new questions in sequence (one after the other), this parameter is carried over to subsequent questions. E.g. if you create question #1 with &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter will be pre-set to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; for question #2, etc. You can of course change this parameter at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;Manage Questions&#039;&#039; section of the Questions editing page, once a question has been created, you can use the green and red dots to switch its Required state, as a shortcut alternative of editing the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-49-48.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parent Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Text===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your question text in this box. The HTML editor is available, which means that you can display not only formatted text but also images or other media in a questionnaire&#039;s questions text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question Types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of question from the drop-down list and click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add selected question type&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===---Page Break---===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to insert page breaks in longish questionnaires. Note that if a page contains questions with required response the respondent will not be allowed to navigate to the next page unless those required responses have been given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire uses the Conditional branching feature, then page breaks will be &#039;&#039;automatically&#039;&#039; inserted when you add &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions. Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct &amp;quot;Conditional branching&amp;quot; flow cannot be moved or deleted. Their Move and Delete icons are disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-58-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Boxes===&lt;br /&gt;
Check boxes allow the user to select multiple answers from a list of options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-58-42.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Options ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Question text: What are your favorite hobbies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible answers:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border: #666666 thin solid&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Watching TV&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Dancing &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Computing&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another hobby:&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-29-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other: &#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# You may provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Check Boxes question, but this might cause problems so it is &#039;&#039;not recommended&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# When a respondent answers a&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Boxes&#039;&#039;&#039; question which has been created as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Min. forced responses &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; Max. forced responses&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters have been used, then a warning message will be displayed if respondent does not check the required number of boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
# Note that, if the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option has been created, then if it is checked by the respondent, it will count in the total of minimum/maximum required check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;that box will be unchecked&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has cheked &#039;&#039;a fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and unckecks that box, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field will be automatically emptied (cool, ain&#039;t it?).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Use the day/month/year format, e.g. for March 14th, 1945: &#039;&#039;&#039;14/3/1945&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted date. The format will depend upon the language currently being used by the questionnaire respondent. For example 4/21/2007 (US); 21/4/2007 (UK); 21-4-2007 (France); etc. An example will be displayed in the questionnaire. If an &amp;quot;impossible&amp;quot; or wrongly formatted date is entered, it will either be re-written or reformatted correctly (if possible) or an error message will be displayed to the respondent. In order for dates to be correctly exported to spreadsheets such as Excel, respondent must enter &#039;&#039;a date in the 1902 to 2037 range&#039;&#039;. If a date outside this range is expected from respondents, then use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Text Box&#039;&#039;&#039; question type instead. The date question type will accept dates consisting only of a month plus a year (e.g. 12/2008 for december 2008) or only a year (e.g. 2008). However, for spreadsheet processing compatibility, such incomplete dates will be automatically transformed to complete dd/mm/yy dates, e.g. 12/2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/&#039;&#039;&#039;12/2008 and 2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/01/&#039;&#039;&#039;2008. You may have to explain this pecularity to your questionnaire users beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dropdown Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no real advantage to using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;&#039; over using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039; except perhaps for longish lists of options, to save screen space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Box===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-11-45.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This question will display a plain text box with &#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea columns&#039;&#039; (or area &#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;) and &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea rows&#039;&#039; (number of text &#039;&#039;lines&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave both x and y to their default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value (or if you set it to &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;), then moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML editor&#039;&#039;&#039; will be displayed with standard height and width (if available in the course/user context &amp;amp; user profile).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Label===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a question but a (short) text which will be displayed to introduce a series of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numeric===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted number. By using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Max. digits allowed &#039;&#039;&#039;and &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of decimal digits &#039;&#039;&#039;parameters you can specify the length and number of decimal places required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Radio Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-03-17.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons Alignment====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-35-04.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
You must fill in one answer per line in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 250&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 243&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 434&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | (optional horizontal display)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 1.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 2.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 3.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Text data export &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 4.Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
red::the color of blood &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; blue::the color of the sky &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; black::opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of blood&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of the sky&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; The &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; red, blue and black will be exported to the columns instead of standard 1, 2 and 3 numbers.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; See [[Viewing_Questionnaire_responses#Download_in_text_format|Download in text format]]. &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 5.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0=Never&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 1=Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 7=Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; How often do you practise a sport? &#039;&#039;&#039;Never &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other:&#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in Example #3 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# It does not make sense to provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Radio Buttons question.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;a warning message will be displayed&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has checked a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and clicks a different radio button in the same question, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field previously entered will be automatically emptied.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example #4 shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - named values as data instead of standard numbers. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each choice will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate (scale 1..5) ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example: ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Rate question now features extra &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons. This is especially useful in Rate questions with a long list of choices.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-23-57.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the respondent forgets to check some radio buttons, upon moving to next page or submitting, the error message will be completed with highlighting of the &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-26-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-26-37.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Number of scale items ====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;is the &#039;&#039;number of items&#039;&#039; to be used in your rate scale. You would normally use a value of 3 to 5. Default value: &#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Type of rate scale ====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039;&#039; (default value)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; N/A columns &#039;&#039;&#039; : Choose this if you want an &#039;&#039;&#039;N/A&#039;&#039;&#039; column to be added to the right of your Rate scale items columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this if you want &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;to prevent duplicate choices in each degree &#039;&#039;&#039;column&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
** This is useful if you want the respondent to rank a number of items on a 1 to n scale and to force each rank to be unique. Example: order items A, B and C in order of preference will accept: &#039;&#039;A1, B3 and C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A3, B2 and C1&#039;&#039;, but &#039;&#039;it will not be possible&#039;&#039; for the respondent to enter: &#039;&#039;A1, B1, C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A1, B2, C2,&#039;&#039; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** Used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]], this &#039;&#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039; option can also be useful if you want the respondent to match items with named degrees, e.g. the colors &#039;&#039;red, blue, yellow&#039;&#039; with a set of physiological responses: &#039;&#039;excitement, tranquillity, concentration&#039;&#039; where &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; color can only match &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; physiological response.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this to create a question of the &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s semantic differential] type. This parameter must be used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
Examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 1 Rate&#039;&#039;&#039; (single line) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter a blank space or a short &amp;quot;label&amp;quot;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 columns numbered 1...5);&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Normal&#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013_13-53-43.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2 Rate &#039;&#039;&#039; (several lines)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Desire2Learn&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Sakai&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 columns numbered 1...4)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; N/A column &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-50-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2a Rate (&amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot;) &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option makes it impossible to click more than one radio button per column; it is thus equivalent to an &amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot; question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3 (3 columns numbered 1...3) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-59-31.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3 Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here)&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-04-00.jpg|800px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3b Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
formatting::Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
layout::Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
clicks::Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
addcontent::Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
appearance::Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
navigation::Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If the choice options text is fairly long, you may use shorter &amp;quot;labels&amp;quot; immediately followed by two colons (::).&lt;br /&gt;
The labels &amp;quot;formatting&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;layout&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;clicks&amp;quot; etc. will be saved to the columns headings in the Download as text format operation, instead of the longer labels which will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039; that in former versions of Questionnaire the separator between &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;options text&amp;quot; used to be the equal sign (=). In Questionnaire 2.5 and later, please use two colons (::) as a separator.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 4 [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s Semantic differential] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1=--&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 2=-&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=±&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 4=+&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=++&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; weak|strong&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cold|warm&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cowardly|brave&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Note.- &#039;&#039;&#039; To separate the pairs of words you must use a pipe character &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-06-54.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;anchor_one&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this question type you have two display options. The default option displays the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Likert_scale Likert] scale degrees as numbers (1...5). If you prefer to have named degrees instead of numbers, you&#039;ll have to enter those names in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; list (see &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; above). On each line of &amp;quot;possible answers&amp;quot; enter the degree number, &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;=&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the name you want to give to that degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each named degree will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions_2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;&#039;the number of named degrees&#039;&#039; in the possible answers list &#039;&#039;is different from the number determined by the value you entered&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of scale items&#039;&#039;&#039; field, this will be automatically adjusted when you save the question. If you decide to use named degrees for your Likert scale, it is recommended (but not obligatory) to start your list of possible answers with the named degrees, and then to enter the various &#039;&#039;items&#039;&#039; to be scaled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example #3b shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - shorter label instead of the longer text values. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option. Please note that the example is provided here for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question sub-type but it works for all Rate question sub-types except Osgood which requires short left and right options anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Text Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Text Box question type, enter the Input Box length and the Maximum text length of text to be entered by respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values are 20 characters for the Input Box width and 25 characters for the maximum length of text entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Yes/No===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage questions&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Questions page, you can conduct a number of operations on a Questionnaire&#039;s questions. Normally you should never add questions or delete questions in a questionnaire that is live in a moodle course, and which some students may have already responded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Move a question to a different position in the Questionnaire. If your questionnaire contains some &amp;quot;conditional branching&amp;quot; questions, you may not be able to move some of the parent or child questions to some positions which would ruin the branching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Edit a question, but again, be extra careful when editing questions once students have started to complete a questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a child or parent question (in a Conditional branching questionnaire), you will be warned of the possible consequences of those deletions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the Green or Red dots, you can switch the &amp;quot;Response required&amp;quot; status of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the numbers in front of each question in this interface are &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; the question numbers that will be displayed when answering the questionnaire. Here, these numbers indicate the question&#039;s position, and even non-real questions such as Labels and Page Breaks have a position number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editando preguntas de un cuestionario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109254</id>
		<title>Editing Questionnaire questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109254"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T10:36:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Possible answers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing questions==&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Editing Questions&#039;&#039;&#039; page is displayed a drop-down list of the question types available and a list of the questions already created for the current questionnaire instance (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* Using the standard Moodle icons you can change the order of the questions in the questionnaire, edit or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; using the Conditional Branching or the Personality Test features====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;&#039;optionally&#039;&#039; enter a &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; for each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire does not use the &amp;quot;Conditional Branching&amp;quot; or the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; is only used when you export responses to CSV/Excel format. If you never export to CSV, then you needn&#039;t worry about Question names. If you plan to regularly export your questionnaire data to CSV, then you have a choice of two options for question naming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 1: significant names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name &#039;&#039;&#039; box, enter &#039;&#039;meaningful&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;short&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;different&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question names for all of the questions within one questionnaire. In the CSV export file, all those question names will be prefixed with the question&#039;s actual number (= position) in the quiz. Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05_favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| why_use_Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06_why_use_moodle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
user-friendliness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; (rate question with 3 possible answers: Moodle, WebCT and Blackboard) &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;WebCT&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 2: leave the Question Name boxes blank=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each un-named question, CSV export will automatically generate a question name. This is required for table header fields in the CSV and subsequent Excel tables or any statistics package you might be using. The question name generated will be based on the question number in the actual Quiz (excluding &#039;&#039;Section Text&#039;&#039; pseudo-questions, of course) e.g. Q01, Q02, ... Q99. For questions with multiple answers, such as rate-type or Likert type questions, a sub-question number will be generated (Q02_1, Q02_2, Q02_3, etc.). This type of &amp;quot;short-name&amp;quot; naming scheme is advisable for exporting your data to a statistics software. Of course, it&#039;s up to you to have your own system for remembering which abbreviated question name corresponds to which question in your questionnaire!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_3&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is quite possible (but maybe not advisable) to mix the two systems, and have within one questionnaire both named and un-named questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires using the Conditional Branching feature====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a question to be used as the &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; of one or more subsequent questions in your questionnaire, then you &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; name that &amp;quot;parent question&amp;quot;. Only those (radio buttons, dropdown list or yes/no) questions with a &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; will appear in the Parent question dropdown list when adding a new question, as shown on the following screenshots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-26-11.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-34-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response Required===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, response to this question will be required, i.e. the respondent will not be able to submit the questionnaire until this question has been answered. If the respondent tries to submit a questionnaire with unanswered required questions (or, in the case of a questionnaire with more than one section, to go to the next page), a warning message will be displayed with a list of all the missing &#039;&#039;required &#039;&#039;questions in the questionnaire (or on the actual page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default.- &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- When you create new questions in sequence (one after the other), this parameter is carried over to subsequent questions. E.g. if you create question #1 with &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter will be pre-set to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; for question #2, etc. You can of course change this parameter at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;Manage Questions&#039;&#039; section of the Questions editing page, once a question has been created, you can use the green and red dots to switch its Required state, as a shortcut alternative of editing the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-49-48.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parent Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Text===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your question text in this box. The HTML editor is available, which means that you can display not only formatted text but also images or other media in a questionnaire&#039;s questions text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question Types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of question from the drop-down list and click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add selected question type&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===---Page Break---===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to insert page breaks in longish questionnaires. Note that if a page contains questions with required response the respondent will not be allowed to navigate to the next page unless those required responses have been given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire uses the Conditional branching feature, then page breaks will be &#039;&#039;automatically&#039;&#039; inserted when you add &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions. Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct &amp;quot;Conditional branching&amp;quot; flow cannot be moved or deleted. Their Move and Delete icons are disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-58-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Boxes===&lt;br /&gt;
Check boxes allow the user to select multiple answers from a list of options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-58-42.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Question text: What are your favorite hobbies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible answers:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border: #666666 thin solid&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Watching TV&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Dancing &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Computing&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another hobby:&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-29-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other: &#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# You may provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Check Boxes question, but this might cause problems so it is &#039;&#039;not recommended&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# When a respondent answers a&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Boxes&#039;&#039;&#039; question which has been created as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Min. forced responses &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; Max. forced responses&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters have been used, then a warning message will be displayed if respondent does not check the required number of boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
# Note that, if the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option has been created, then if it is checked by the respondent, it will count in the total of minimum/maximum required check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;that box will be unchecked&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has cheked &#039;&#039;a fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and unckecks that box, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field will be automatically emptied (cool, ain&#039;t it?).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Use the day/month/year format, e.g. for March 14th, 1945: &#039;&#039;&#039;14/3/1945&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted date. The format will depend upon the language currently being used by the questionnaire respondent. For example 4/21/2007 (US); 21/4/2007 (UK); 21-4-2007 (France); etc. An example will be displayed in the questionnaire. If an &amp;quot;impossible&amp;quot; or wrongly formatted date is entered, it will either be re-written or reformatted correctly (if possible) or an error message will be displayed to the respondent. In order for dates to be correctly exported to spreadsheets such as Excel, respondent must enter &#039;&#039;a date in the 1902 to 2037 range&#039;&#039;. If a date outside this range is expected from respondents, then use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Text Box&#039;&#039;&#039; question type instead. The date question type will accept dates consisting only of a month plus a year (e.g. 12/2008 for december 2008) or only a year (e.g. 2008). However, for spreadsheet processing compatibility, such incomplete dates will be automatically transformed to complete dd/mm/yy dates, e.g. 12/2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/&#039;&#039;&#039;12/2008 and 2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/01/&#039;&#039;&#039;2008. You may have to explain this pecularity to your questionnaire users beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dropdown Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no real advantage to using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;&#039; over using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039; except perhaps for longish lists of options, to save screen space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Box===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-11-45.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This question will display a plain text box with &#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea columns&#039;&#039; (or area &#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;) and &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea rows&#039;&#039; (number of text &#039;&#039;lines&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave both x and y to their default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value (or if you set it to &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;), then moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML editor&#039;&#039;&#039; will be displayed with standard height and width (if available in the course/user context &amp;amp; user profile).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Label===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a question but a (short) text which will be displayed to introduce a series of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numeric===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted number. By using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Max. digits allowed &#039;&#039;&#039;and &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of decimal digits &#039;&#039;&#039;parameters you can specify the length and number of decimal places required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Radio Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-03-17.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons Alignment====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-35-04.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
You must fill in one answer per line in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 250&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 243&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 434&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | (optional horizontal display)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 1.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 2.Possible answers&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 3.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Text data export &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 4.Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
red::the color of blood &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; blue::the color of the sky &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; black::opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of blood&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of the sky&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; The &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; red, blue and black will be exported to the columns instead of standard 1, 2 and 3 numbers.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; See [[Viewing_Questionnaire_responses#Download_in_text_format|Download in text format]]. &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 5.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0=Never&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 1=Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 7=Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; How often do you practise a sport? &#039;&#039;&#039;Never &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other:&#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in Example #3 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# It does not make sense to provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Radio Buttons question.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;a warning message will be displayed&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has checked a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and clicks a different radio button in the same question, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field previously entered will be automatically emptied.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example #4 shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - named values as data instead of standard numbers. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each choice will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate (scale 1..5) ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example: ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Rate question now features extra &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons. This is especially useful in Rate questions with a long list of choices.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-23-57.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the respondent forgets to check some radio buttons, upon moving to next page or submitting, the error message will be completed with highlighting of the &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-26-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-26-37.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Number of scale items ====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;is the &#039;&#039;number of items&#039;&#039; to be used in your rate scale. You would normally use a value of 3 to 5. Default value: &#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Type of rate scale ====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039;&#039; (default value)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; N/A columns &#039;&#039;&#039; : Choose this if you want an &#039;&#039;&#039;N/A&#039;&#039;&#039; column to be added to the right of your Rate scale items columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this if you want &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;to prevent duplicate choices in each degree &#039;&#039;&#039;column&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
** This is useful if you want the respondent to rank a number of items on a 1 to n scale and to force each rank to be unique. Example: order items A, B and C in order of preference will accept: &#039;&#039;A1, B3 and C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A3, B2 and C1&#039;&#039;, but &#039;&#039;it will not be possible&#039;&#039; for the respondent to enter: &#039;&#039;A1, B1, C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A1, B2, C2,&#039;&#039; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** Used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]], this &#039;&#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039; option can also be useful if you want the respondent to match items with named degrees, e.g. the colors &#039;&#039;red, blue, yellow&#039;&#039; with a set of physiological responses: &#039;&#039;excitement, tranquillity, concentration&#039;&#039; where &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; color can only match &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; physiological response.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this to create a question of the &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s semantic differential] type. This parameter must be used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
Examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 1 Rate&#039;&#039;&#039; (single line) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter a blank space or a short &amp;quot;label&amp;quot;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 columns numbered 1...5);&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Normal&#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013_13-53-43.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2 Rate &#039;&#039;&#039; (several lines)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Desire2Learn&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Sakai&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 columns numbered 1...4)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; N/A column &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-50-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2a Rate (&amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot;) &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option makes it impossible to click more than one radio button per column; it is thus equivalent to an &amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot; question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3 (3 columns numbered 1...3) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-59-31.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3 Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here)&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-04-00.jpg|800px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3b Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
formatting::Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
layout::Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
clicks::Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
addcontent::Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
appearance::Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
navigation::Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If the choice options text is fairly long, you may use shorter &amp;quot;labels&amp;quot; immediately followed by two colons (::).&lt;br /&gt;
The labels &amp;quot;formatting&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;layout&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;clicks&amp;quot; etc. will be saved to the columns headings in the Download as text format operation, instead of the longer labels which will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039; that in former versions of Questionnaire the separator between &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;options text&amp;quot; used to be the equal sign (=). In Questionnaire 2.5 and later, please use two colons (::) as a separator.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 4 [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s Semantic differential] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1=--&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 2=-&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=±&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 4=+&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=++&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; weak|strong&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cold|warm&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cowardly|brave&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Note.- &#039;&#039;&#039; To separate the pairs of words you must use a pipe character &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-06-54.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;anchor_one&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this question type you have two display options. The default option displays the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Likert_scale Likert] scale degrees as numbers (1...5). If you prefer to have named degrees instead of numbers, you&#039;ll have to enter those names in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; list (see &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; above). On each line of &amp;quot;possible answers&amp;quot; enter the degree number, &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;=&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the name you want to give to that degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each named degree will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions_2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;&#039;the number of named degrees&#039;&#039; in the possible answers list &#039;&#039;is different from the number determined by the value you entered&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of scale items&#039;&#039;&#039; field, this will be automatically adjusted when you save the question. If you decide to use named degrees for your Likert scale, it is recommended (but not obligatory) to start your list of possible answers with the named degrees, and then to enter the various &#039;&#039;items&#039;&#039; to be scaled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example #3b shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - shorter label instead of the longer text values. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option. Please note that the example is provided here for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question sub-type but it works for all Rate question sub-types except Osgood which requires short left and right options anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Text Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Text Box question type, enter the Input Box length and the Maximum text length of text to be entered by respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values are 20 characters for the Input Box width and 25 characters for the maximum length of text entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Yes/No===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage questions&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Questions page, you can conduct a number of operations on a Questionnaire&#039;s questions. Normally you should never add questions or delete questions in a questionnaire that is live in a moodle course, and which some students may have already responded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Move a question to a different position in the Questionnaire. If your questionnaire contains some &amp;quot;conditional branching&amp;quot; questions, you may not be able to move some of the parent or child questions to some positions which would ruin the branching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Edit a question, but again, be extra careful when editing questions once students have started to complete a questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a child or parent question (in a Conditional branching questionnaire), you will be warned of the possible consequences of those deletions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the Green or Red dots, you can switch the &amp;quot;Response required&amp;quot; status of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the numbers in front of each question in this interface are &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; the question numbers that will be displayed when answering the questionnaire. Here, these numbers indicate the question&#039;s position, and even non-real questions such as Labels and Page Breaks have a position number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editando preguntas de un cuestionario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109253</id>
		<title>Editing Questionnaire questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Editing_Questionnaire_questions&amp;diff=109253"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T10:27:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Questionnaires not using the Conditional Branching feature */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing questions==&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Questionnaire &#039;&#039;&#039;Editing Questions&#039;&#039;&#039; page is displayed a drop-down list of the question types available and a list of the questions already created for the current questionnaire instance (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* Using the standard Moodle icons you can change the order of the questions in the questionnaire, edit or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; using the Conditional Branching or the Personality Test features====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;&#039;optionally&#039;&#039; enter a &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; for each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire does not use the &amp;quot;Conditional Branching&amp;quot; or the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039; is only used when you export responses to CSV/Excel format. If you never export to CSV, then you needn&#039;t worry about Question names. If you plan to regularly export your questionnaire data to CSV, then you have a choice of two options for question naming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 1: significant names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name &#039;&#039;&#039; box, enter &#039;&#039;meaningful&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;short&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;different&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question names for all of the questions within one questionnaire. In the CSV export file, all those question names will be prefixed with the question&#039;s actual number (= position) in the quiz. Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05_favorite colors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| why_use_Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06_why_use_moodle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
user-friendliness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; (rate question with 3 possible answers: Moodle, WebCT and Blackboard) &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;WebCT&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_user-friendliness-&amp;gt;Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Option 2: leave the Question Name boxes blank=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each un-named question, CSV export will automatically generate a question name. This is required for table header fields in the CSV and subsequent Excel tables or any statistics package you might be using. The question name generated will be based on the question number in the actual Quiz (excluding &#039;&#039;Section Text&#039;&#039; pseudo-questions, of course) e.g. Q01, Q02, ... Q99. For questions with multiple answers, such as rate-type or Likert type questions, a sub-question number will be generated (Q02_1, Q02_2, Q02_3, etc.). This type of &amp;quot;short-name&amp;quot; naming scheme is advisable for exporting your data to a statistics software. Of course, it&#039;s up to you to have your own system for remembering which abbreviated question name corresponds to which question in your questionnaire!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question number (position) in the questionnaire&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | question name entered by teacher&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 33%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | field header in csv export&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| Q06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color: #CCCCCC&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Q07_1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Q07_3&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is quite possible (but maybe not advisable) to mix the two systems, and have within one questionnaire both named and un-named questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Questionnaires using the Conditional Branching feature====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a question to be used as the &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; of one or more subsequent questions in your questionnaire, then you &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; name that &amp;quot;parent question&amp;quot;. Only those (radio buttons, dropdown list or yes/no) questions with a &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; will appear in the Parent question dropdown list when adding a new question, as shown on the following screenshots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-26-11.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-34-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Response Required===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, response to this question will be required, i.e. the respondent will not be able to submit the questionnaire until this question has been answered. If the respondent tries to submit a questionnaire with unanswered required questions (or, in the case of a questionnaire with more than one section, to go to the next page), a warning message will be displayed with a list of all the missing &#039;&#039;required &#039;&#039;questions in the questionnaire (or on the actual page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default.- &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- When you create new questions in sequence (one after the other), this parameter is carried over to subsequent questions. E.g. if you create question #1 with &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter will be pre-set to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; for question #2, etc. You can of course change this parameter at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;Manage Questions&#039;&#039; section of the Questions editing page, once a question has been created, you can use the green and red dots to switch its Required state, as a shortcut alternative of editing the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-49-48.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parent Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Questionnaire_Conditional_branching|Conditional branching]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Text===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your question text in this box. The HTML editor is available, which means that you can display not only formatted text but also images or other media in a questionnaire&#039;s questions text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question Types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of question from the drop-down list and click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add selected question type&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===---Page Break---===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to insert page breaks in longish questionnaires. Note that if a page contains questions with required response the respondent will not be allowed to navigate to the next page unless those required responses have been given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questionnaire uses the Conditional branching feature, then page breaks will be &#039;&#039;automatically&#039;&#039; inserted when you add &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;child&amp;quot; questions. Page breaks which are needed to ensure a correct &amp;quot;Conditional branching&amp;quot; flow cannot be moved or deleted. Their Move and Delete icons are disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-58-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Boxes===&lt;br /&gt;
Check boxes allow the user to select multiple answers from a list of options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-58-42.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Question text: What are your favorite hobbies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible answers:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border: #666666 thin solid&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Watching TV&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Dancing &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Computing&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another hobby:&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-29-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An&amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other: &#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# You may provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Check Boxes question, but this might cause problems so it is &#039;&#039;not recommended&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# When a respondent answers a&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Boxes&#039;&#039;&#039; question which has been created as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Min. forced responses &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; Max. forced responses&#039;&#039;&#039; parameters have been used, then a warning message will be displayed if respondent does not check the required number of boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
# Note that, if the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option has been created, then if it is checked by the respondent, it will count in the total of minimum/maximum required check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;that box will be unchecked&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has cheked &#039;&#039;a fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;check box&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and unckecks that box, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field will be automatically emptied (cool, ain&#039;t it?).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Use the day/month/year format, e.g. for March 14th, 1945: &#039;&#039;&#039;14/3/1945&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted date. The format will depend upon the language currently being used by the questionnaire respondent. For example 4/21/2007 (US); 21/4/2007 (UK); 21-4-2007 (France); etc. An example will be displayed in the questionnaire. If an &amp;quot;impossible&amp;quot; or wrongly formatted date is entered, it will either be re-written or reformatted correctly (if possible) or an error message will be displayed to the respondent. In order for dates to be correctly exported to spreadsheets such as Excel, respondent must enter &#039;&#039;a date in the 1902 to 2037 range&#039;&#039;. If a date outside this range is expected from respondents, then use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Text Box&#039;&#039;&#039; question type instead. The date question type will accept dates consisting only of a month plus a year (e.g. 12/2008 for december 2008) or only a year (e.g. 2008). However, for spreadsheet processing compatibility, such incomplete dates will be automatically transformed to complete dd/mm/yy dates, e.g. 12/2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/&#039;&#039;&#039;12/2008 and 2008 -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;01/01/&#039;&#039;&#039;2008. You may have to explain this pecularity to your questionnaire users beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dropdown Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no real advantage to using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;&#039; over using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039; except perhaps for longish lists of options, to save screen space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Box===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-11-45.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This question will display a plain text box with &#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea columns&#039;&#039; (or area &#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;) and &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Textarea rows&#039;&#039; (number of text &#039;&#039;lines&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave both x and y to their default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value (or if you set it to &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;), then moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML editor&#039;&#039;&#039; will be displayed with standard height and width (if available in the course/user context &amp;amp; user profile).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Label===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a question but a (short) text which will be displayed to introduce a series of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numeric===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this question type if you expect the response to be a correctly formatted number. By using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Max. digits allowed &#039;&#039;&#039;and &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of decimal digits &#039;&#039;&#039;parameters you can specify the length and number of decimal places required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Radio Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Question editing interface====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 15-03-17.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Radio buttons Alignment====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-35-04.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
You must fill in one answer per line in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 250&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 243&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 434&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | (optional horizontal display)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 1.Possible answers &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 2.Possible answers &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Other:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 3.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; !other=Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Blue&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Black&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Red  Blue  Black &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Another color:&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Text data export &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 4.Possible answers: &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
red::the color of blood &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; blue::the color of the sky &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; black::opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; What is your favorite color? &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of blood&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; the color of the sky&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; opposite of white&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; The &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; red, blue and black will be exported to the columns instead of standard 1, 2 and 3 numbers.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; See [[Viewing_Questionnaire_responses#Download_in_text_format|Download in text format]]. &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; 5.Possible answers:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0=Never&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 1=Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 7=Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; How often do you practise a sport? &#039;&#039;&#039;Never &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a year&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a month&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a week&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Once a day&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other”&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on a line to create an &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option. An &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; box defaults to using the prompt &#039;&#039;Other:&#039;&#039;, (or the equivalent translation for &#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039; in the current language being used). You may change this default prompt by using the format: &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;“!other=&#039;&#039;prompt text”&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as shown in Example #3 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the moment the length of the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; input text box is set to 25 characters and is not customizable through the online interface.&lt;br /&gt;
# It does not make sense to provide more than one &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;!other&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option for a Radio Buttons question.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent checks a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and leaves the text field empty, &#039;&#039;a warning message will be displayed&#039;&#039; (upon navigating to the next page or upon submitting the questionnaire).&lt;br /&gt;
# If a respondent has checked a &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; option &#039;&#039;&#039;radio button&#039;&#039;&#039; and has filled in the text field, and later on changes his mind and clicks a different radio button in the same question, the &#039;&#039;fill in the blank&#039;&#039; text field previously entered will be automatically emptied.&lt;br /&gt;
# Example #4 shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - named values as data instead of standard numbers. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each choice will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate (scale 1..5) ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example: ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Rate question now features extra &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons. This is especially useful in Rate questions with a long list of choices.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-23-57.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the respondent forgets to check some radio buttons, upon moving to next page or submitting, the error message will be completed with highlighting of the &amp;quot;not yet answered&amp;quot; radio buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-26-58.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Question editing interface: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-26-37.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Number of scale items ====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;is the &#039;&#039;number of items&#039;&#039; to be used in your rate scale. You would normally use a value of 3 to 5. Default value: &#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Type of rate scale ====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039;&#039; (default value)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; N/A columns &#039;&#039;&#039; : Choose this if you want an &#039;&#039;&#039;N/A&#039;&#039;&#039; column to be added to the right of your Rate scale items columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this if you want &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;to prevent duplicate choices in each degree &#039;&#039;&#039;column&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
** This is useful if you want the respondent to rank a number of items on a 1 to n scale and to force each rank to be unique. Example: order items A, B and C in order of preference will accept: &#039;&#039;A1, B3 and C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A3, B2 and C1&#039;&#039;, but &#039;&#039;it will not be possible&#039;&#039; for the respondent to enter: &#039;&#039;A1, B1, C2&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;A1, B2, C2,&#039;&#039; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** Used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]], this &#039;&#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&#039; option can also be useful if you want the respondent to match items with named degrees, e.g. the colors &#039;&#039;red, blue, yellow&#039;&#039; with a set of physiological responses: &#039;&#039;excitement, tranquillity, concentration&#039;&#039; where &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; color can only match &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; physiological response.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;: Choose this to create a question of the &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s semantic differential] type. This parameter must be used in conjunction with [[#anchor_one|named degrees]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible answers====&lt;br /&gt;
Examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Editing Mode&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;width: 50%&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; | Questionnaire View&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 1 Rate&#039;&#039;&#039; (single line) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter a blank space or a short &amp;quot;label&amp;quot;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 columns numbered 1...5);&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Normal&#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013_13-53-43.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2 Rate &#039;&#039;&#039; (several lines)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Desire2Learn&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Sakai&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 columns numbered 1...4)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; N/A column &#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-50-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 2a Rate (&amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot;) &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option makes it impossible to click more than one radio button per column; it is thus equivalent to an &amp;quot;ordering&amp;quot; question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3 (3 columns numbered 1...3) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;No duplicate choices&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 13-59-31.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3 Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4 (4 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039; Normal &#039;&#039; (N/A column not needed here)&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-04-00.jpg|800px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 3b Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees &#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4=Very easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3=Easy to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2=Somewhat difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1=Difficult to use&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
formatting::Formatting Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
layout::Laying out Your Course&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
clicks::Number of Clicks to Access Needed Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
addcontent::Adding Content&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
appearance::Ability to Add/Change Themes/Appearance&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
navigation::Overall Navigation of Moodle&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If the choice options text is fairly long, you may use shorter &amp;quot;labels&amp;quot; immediately followed by two colons (::).&lt;br /&gt;
The labels &amp;quot;formatting&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;layout&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;clicks&amp;quot; etc. will be saved to the columns headings in the Download as text format operation, instead of the longer labels which will be displayed to the questionnaire respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039; that in former versions of Questionnaire the separator between &amp;quot;short label&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;options text&amp;quot; used to be the equal sign (=). In Questionnaire 2.5 and later, please use two colons (::) as a separator.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Ex. 4 [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Semantic_differential Osgood&#039;s Semantic differential] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Possible answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1=--&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 2=-&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 3=±&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 4=+&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; 5=++&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; weak|strong&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cold|warm&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; cowardly|brave&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Settings: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Nb of scale items &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = 5 (5 named columns) &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Type of rate scale &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; = &#039;&#039;Osgood&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Note.- &#039;&#039;&#039; To separate the pairs of words you must use a pipe character &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:05-08-2013 14-06-54.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes.-&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;anchor_one&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this question type you have two display options. The default option displays the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Likert_scale Likert] scale degrees as numbers (1...5). If you prefer to have named degrees instead of numbers, you&#039;ll have to enter those names in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; list (see &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; above). On each line of &amp;quot;possible answers&amp;quot; enter the degree number, &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;=&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the name you want to give to that degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use the &amp;quot;Personality Test&amp;quot; feature in your questionnaire, the number preceding each named degree will be used to calculate the &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; of the section that includes this question. See https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/mod/questionnaire/personality_test#Questions_2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;&#039;the number of named degrees&#039;&#039; in the possible answers list &#039;&#039;is different from the number determined by the value you entered&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Nb of scale items&#039;&#039;&#039; field, this will be automatically adjusted when you save the question. If you decide to use named degrees for your Likert scale, it is recommended (but not obligatory) to start your list of possible answers with the named degrees, and then to enter the various &#039;&#039;items&#039;&#039; to be scaled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example #3b shows a possible &amp;quot;hidden&amp;quot; option, for exporting - in responses - shorter label instead of the longer text values. If you never export your data for studying it in stats packages you won&#039;t need this option. Please note that the example is provided here for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Rate &#039;&#039;with named degrees&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question sub-type but it works for all Rate question sub-types except Osgood which requires short left and right options anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Text Box===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Text Box question type, enter the Input Box length and the Maximum text length of text to be entered by respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values are 20 characters for the Input Box width and 25 characters for the maximum length of text entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Yes/No===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage questions&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Questions page, you can conduct a number of operations on a Questionnaire&#039;s questions. Normally you should never add questions or delete questions in a questionnaire that is live in a moodle course, and which some students may have already responded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Move a question to a different position in the Questionnaire. If your questionnaire contains some &amp;quot;conditional branching&amp;quot; questions, you may not be able to move some of the parent or child questions to some positions which would ruin the branching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can Edit a question, but again, be extra careful when editing questions once students have started to complete a questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to Delete a child or parent question (in a Conditional branching questionnaire), you will be warned of the possible consequences of those deletions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the Green or Red dots, you can switch the &amp;quot;Response required&amp;quot; status of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the numbers in front of each question in this interface are &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; the question numbers that will be displayed when answering the questionnaire. Here, these numbers indicate the question&#039;s position, and even non-real questions such as Labels and Page Breaks have a position number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editando preguntas de un cuestionario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Setting_up_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109240</id>
		<title>Setting up a questionnaire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Setting_up_a_questionnaire&amp;diff=109240"/>
		<updated>2014-01-23T10:21:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Public questionnaire roll out to multiple courses */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created a questionnaire you can define extra settings in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; link/tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Questionnaire Type===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three types of questionnaires:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Private &#039;&#039;&#039; - belongs to the course it is defined in only. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; This is the standard Moodle module concept. You create a questionnaire and its questions for the course it is defined in. Editing teachers of that course can change the questionnaire and all teachers can review the results.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Template &#039;&#039;&#039; - can be copied and edited. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; This type of questionnaire cannot be used directly, but its content can be copied into a new questionnaire and edited.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039; Public &#039;&#039;&#039; - can be shared among courses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; If a questionnaire has already been created (in another course on the same Moodle site) with the &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; setting, then you may use that &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; questionnaire in your own course(s). The number of settings available to such questionnaires is limited and you cannot edit its questions nor view the responses. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If a public questionnaire has been created in course A, it can be &amp;quot;used&amp;quot; in courses B, C, ... All the responses from courses A, B, C, ... are collected in the public questionnaire created in course A (the original course where it was created) and are viewable there by the person (admin or teacher) who originally created it.&lt;br /&gt;
====Public questionnaire roll out to multiple courses====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create a Public questionnaire whose aliases can be placed in several courses. The student responses will only be visible in the course where the original Public questionnaire has been created. There are mainly 2 applications of this setup. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
case 1.- An admin may want to see course evaluations by students without the course teachers seeing those evaluations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
case 2.- A teacher teaching several courses may want to &amp;quot;consolidate&amp;quot; the results of several questionnaires (in his various courses) into one unique Public questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s how you do it (for case1)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a course that will simply be a shell for any public questionnaires. Give it whatever title you like, e.g. PubQuestCourse. You can hide the course entirely. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create your questionnaire in this course. Call it e.g. &amp;quot;Public questionnaire01&amp;quot; On the &amp;quot;Advanced settings&amp;quot; page, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039;&#039; for the questionnaire type.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add questions in this public questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Navigate to the course where you want to place an alias of that Public questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add an activity or resource: Questionnaire. Edit all the various settings. Name it e.g. Questionnaire01. For Response options|Type, we suggest you select Respond once. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10-10-2013 09-55-37.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the Content options section, in the radio buttons list, under Use public, the title of the public questionnaire you created in the other course (PubQuestCourse) will appear (e.g. Public questionnaire01): check its radio button. Then finish editing (click the Save and return to course button).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note.- For options 4-6 above, an admin may ask individual teachers to create those questionnaires based on a public questionnaire in their own courses, giving them detailed instructions on how to proceed. Unfortunately at the moment there is no way to automatically deploy a public questionnaire to other courses, it has to be done &amp;quot;by hand&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Student responses will appear in the original questionnaire (e.g. &amp;quot;Public questionnaire01&amp;quot; in course PubQuestCourse), but will not be visible at all in the &amp;quot;local&amp;quot; questionnaire (alias). Teachers will not be able to respond to it or view their students&#039; responses.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT&#039;&#039;&#039; Please note that when you delete a Public questionnaire, you also delete the links to its &amp;quot;dependent&amp;quot; questionnaires in the other courses on your moodle site. If a Public questionnaire is no longer used, the normal procedure is to go to all the other courses that &amp;quot;use&amp;quot; that Public questionnaire and delete them first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Template questionnaire used in multiple courses====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the responses to your questionnaire should remain accessible in the course in which it resides, but the questionnaire itself will follow a standard format with the same questions, use a template-type of questionnaire. So instead of re-creating the questions for each questionnaire, you can apply the template questionnaire to each one you create.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s how you do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a course that will simply be a shell for any template questionnaires. Give it whatever title you like e.g. TempQuestCourse. You can hide the course entirely. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create your questionnaire in this course. On the &amp;quot;Advanced settings&amp;quot; page, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Template&#039;&#039;&#039; for the questionnaire type.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add questions in this template questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Navigate to the course where you want to place an alias of that Template questionnaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add an activity or resource: Questionnaire. Edit all the various settings. Name it e.g. Questionnaire02.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10-10-2013 10-07-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the Content options section, in the radio buttons list, under Copy existing, the title of the Template questionnaire you created in the other course (TempQuestCourse) will appear (e.g. Template questionnaire01): check its radio button. Then finish editing (click the Save and return to course button).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t want your teachers to view or alter questionnaire responses, just define this in the Define Roles settings for Questionnaires. In Define Roles, you can limit teachers from being able to delete responses from the questionnaire, or be able to submit their own questionnaires or view responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Title/Sub-title===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the questionnaire, which will appear at the top of every page. By default Title is set to the questionnaire Name, but you can edit it as you like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Info===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be displayed at the top of the first page of the questionnaire. (i.e. instructions, background info, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Confirmation URL/page===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heading (in bold) and body text for the &amp;quot;Confirmation&amp;quot; page displayed after a user completes this questionnaire. (URL, if present, takes precedence over confirmation text.) If you leave this field empty, a default message will be displayed upon questionnaire completion (&#039;&#039;Thank you for completing this Questionnaire&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a copy of each submission to the specified address or addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
You can provide more than one address by separating them with commas.&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank for no email backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=108791</id>
		<title>Import questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=108791"/>
		<updated>2014-01-09T22:01:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Lesson module process */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a number of different formats that can be used to import questions into [[Question bank]] categories and as [[Adding a question page|lesson question pages]]. These include some proprietary quiz software formats, as well as text files and Moodle formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing questions from an existing file==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to import questions from a file on your network/computer or from a file that has been saved or uploaded into your course files.  The underlying [[Import_questions#Character_encoding|character encoding]] of this file is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Moodle XML format is the recommended import question type format as it enables the maximum amount of question data (such as question feedback) to be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Question bank import process ===&lt;br /&gt;
The question bank allows you a great deal of flexibility when importing questions. To import questions into Moodle&#039;s [[Question bank]], use the Questions link in the course administration and select the import tab. In most versions of Moodle it is also possible to get to this screen (produced by ../question/import.php) while editing an existing quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Questions import 197.png|thumb|center|Import question formats from the import tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select import tab&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the question type to import&lt;br /&gt;
*General: pick the category, determine if the context and category information that maybe contained in a GIFT or XML file should be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select what should happen if there are no grades or an error is detected in the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Determine the file to import&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file upload.  Use the browse function to import a file from your computer. Use the &amp;quot;Upload this file&amp;quot; button to import the questions.&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file already in course files. A popup window will take you to the course files start page. Use the &amp;quot;Import from this file&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank import file gen import 1.png|thumb|center|General and import file parameters sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson module process===&lt;br /&gt;
The question types that can be imported from the Quiz questions bank into a lesson are the following:&lt;br /&gt;
Matching, Multichoice, Numerical, Short answer, True/false.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Description and Cloze questions can &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; be imported from Quiz questions bank into a lesson &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Import question types.png|thumb|center|Lesson screen asking which file type will be imported]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lesson module|Lesson]] can only import from a file located on the teachers computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*In edit, using the expanded view&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the position where questions should be inserted into the lesson&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Import question link between the pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the browse function to find the file on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
*Import the selected file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question import formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[GIFT]] === &lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Moodle XML format|Moodle XML]] ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do you create XML files to enable import of images?====&lt;br /&gt;
Discussion: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=181211&lt;br /&gt;
=====OPTION 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
Check out http://www.slideshare.net/tjuly/adding-images-to-moodle-quiz-and-import-via-xml&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes a use of a text to XML conversion process using http://vletools.com/questions/quiz &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please add any further comments here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====OPTION 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Aiken]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is an easy way of writing multiple-choice questions for import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard === &lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s possible to  import both .dat files containing just questions text or zip archives containing questions and associated medias (images, sounds, ...).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questions contains images they are imported too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also both Blackboard POOL and QTI files are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questions produced with TestGen and Examview softwares and saved as Blackboard files are imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the zip archives contains several resources files all questions from all files are imported. &amp;quot;Undeployed&amp;quot; Blackboard quiz are also supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these steps to import questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a quiz with questions in Examview Test Generator v. 6.2.1 or another question generator able to save questions as Blackboard files like TestGen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Export the quiz to Blackboard 6.0-7.0 format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. From the &#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039; tab for your course choose &#039;&#039;Question bank&#039;&#039; and then &#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;. Make sure you use the Blackboard format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Some tutorials on the web explain that you need to edit files to re-link images. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is no more needed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Images are imported without any editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Importing questions in different categories ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you check the &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; option during import,  the category name for each resource file will be extracted for the resource file and created if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; is unchecked, all questions will be imported in the current category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other alternative method to import Blackboard questions files ====&lt;br /&gt;
There is an alternative to the Blackboard format to import questions saved as Blackboard files.&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder] discussed below in [https://docs.moodle.org/23/en/Import_questions#See_also See Also] can also be used to convert ExamView exports to Moodle XML. &lt;br /&gt;
Images are supported and included within the Moodle XML when using [http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you decide to use MoodleXMLBuilder to convert your Blackboard zip file to a Moodle XML file, rather than use the recommended method to directly import your zip file using the Blackboard format (see above), here is how to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a quiz with questions in Examview Test Generator v. 6.2.1 or another question generator able to save questions as Blackboard files like TestGen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Export the quiz to Blackboard 6.0-7.0 format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Use the aforementioned [http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder] to convert from &#039;&#039;&#039;ExamView Export to Blackboard 6.0-7.0&#039;&#039;&#039; into the XML format that Moodle accepts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. From the &#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039; tab for your course choose &#039;&#039;Question bank&#039;&#039; and then &#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;. Make sure you use the Moodle XML format. You may also need to set &#039;&#039;Stop on error&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FYI To install MoodleXMLBuilder you may need to be logged into an administrator account or select &amp;quot;Run as administrator&amp;quot; from the right-click menu. You&#039;ll also need java and you will need to run the MoodleXMLBuilder.exe application from its install directory (the installer doesn&#039;t seem to create a Start menu entry). For Windows 7 it was C:\Program Files (x86)\MoodleXMLBuilder\MoodleXMLBuilder.exe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course Test Manager === &lt;br /&gt;
This format enables you to import questions from the Course Test Manager from Course Technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|Embedded Answers (Cloze)]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is a multiple question, multiple answer question with embedded answers. They can be a bit tricky to develop, but they are a unique way of asking questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examview === &lt;br /&gt;
ExamView 4 supported an XML export format that Moodle can import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these steps to import questions from ExamView 4.0.8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a new test using ExamView&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. After selecting the types of questions and how many of each Click on File - Export – Change Save As Type to ExamView XML&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. After creating the export of your ExamView test login to your Moodle site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Go to the course you wish to add the quiz to and Turn Editing On&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Scroll down to the topic or week you wish to add a Quiz Click add an activity – highlight quiz, Enter a name and introduction for the quiz and any other applicable information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click save and display&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Editing quiz - click Edit then Import, click the radio button next to ExamView&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Browse to the location you saved the file highlight and click open, then click the upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Review the questions imported, click continue, click on Quiz, select all and click add to quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Save Changes, click on the preview tab view the test and the quiz is ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a newer version of ExamView, you should export your questions from Examview choosing the Blackboard format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In ExamView choose one of the two Blackboard export options, either Blackboard option can be imported into Moodle, however it is recommended to choose the Blackboard 7.1+ option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Save the zip archive ExamView creates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Import this zip file in Moodle using &amp;quot;Blackboard V6+&amp;quot; format. see the above paragraph about the Blackboard V6+ import format for more informations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Hot Potatoes]]===&lt;br /&gt;
A freeware program that can export questions into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 1&#039;&#039;&#039;.- All types of Hot Potatoes question types can be imported into Moodle, but &#039;&#039;JCross&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;JMix&#039;&#039; questions will be changed to Short Answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be imported into the &#039;&#039;Quiz questions&#039;&#039; bank:&lt;br /&gt;
**Cloze questions (&#039;&#039;JCloze&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Match questions (&#039;&#039;JMatch&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Multiple Choice questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
**Short Answer questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;JCross&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;JMix&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be imported into Moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; module:&lt;br /&gt;
**Match questions (&#039;&#039;JMatch&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Multiple Choice questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.- For Hot Potatoes&#039; Multiple Choice question type (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;), the &#039;&#039;Multiple-choice&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Multi-select&#039;&#039; question-type will imported as they are. &#039;&#039;Hybrid&#039;&#039; questions will be imported as &#039;&#039;MultiChoice&#039;&#039; questions, i.e. they will not start as Short Answer questions and then change to Multiple Choice questions after several wrong responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learnwise===&lt;br /&gt;
This format can import multiple choice questions saved in Learnwise&#039;s XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Missing word question format|Missing word]]===&lt;br /&gt;
This format is only used for  multiple choice questions and short answer questions, similar to GIFT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[WebCT format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing multiple choice and short answers questions from WebCT&#039;s text format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution:&#039;&#039;&#039; Keep in mind that WebCT allows more than one &amp;quot;blank&amp;quot; per short answer question; whereas, Moodle will only accommodate one blank per question. Questions that used multiple short answers in a question will not convert successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Word table format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing all question types (except calculated) from structured tables in Microsoft Word files. &lt;br /&gt;
Creating, editing and managing large numbers of questions is much easier in an external Word file than maintaining them one at a time inside Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The contributed plugin is not a standand part of Moodle, but is available in the Moodle Plugins Directory at [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_wordtable  Moodle2Word Word table import/export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing from other programs==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diploma 6 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Diploma 6 also supports an XML export format that Moodle can import. If you are using a newer version of Diploma, here are the steps to export from Diploma and import to Moodle.  The steps are the same as those for Blackboard(see above).&lt;br /&gt;
*Export from Diploma with the Blackboard LS 6.0 – 6.2 format. &lt;br /&gt;
*Import the .zip file using the Blackboard format.  The images are imported at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Old formats===&lt;br /&gt;
*AON -This format is the same as the missing word format, except it creates matching questions from the multiple choice questions. Please note that from Moodle 1.8 it will no longer be part of the standard Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Character encoding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that the imported file is encoded in the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8 UTF-8] standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not adhered to you may get import errors and/or strange characters in the imported materials. If the file is not UTF-8, an external tool must be used to change the encoding. Note that if only basic &#039;latin&#039; characters are used, then the coding issue can generally be ignored. Be particularly careful when creating questions using Microsoft Word. For reasons best known to themselves, Microsoft used their own encoding for some characters (incompatible with UTF-8) and this is likely to break the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you are having problems with the first question (or category modifier) in the file being misinterpreted (this particularly applies to GIFT format) it might be your editor adding a &amp;quot;Byte-Order-Mark&amp;quot; character at the beginning of the file. This is particularly common in Windows programs (e.g. Notepad) and is another good reason to steer clear of Microsoft products for text editing (as apposed to word processing). There are plenty of free or low cost text editors available for download. The BOM is neither recommended or required as UTF8 does not have [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark byte order issues].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Match grades==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imported grades must &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly&#039;&#039;&#039; match one of the fixed list of valid grades, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 66.666, 60, 50, 40, 33.333, 30, 25, 20, 16.666, 14.2857, 12.5, 11.111, 10, 5, 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
negative values of the above list are also permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings for this switch. They affect how the import routine treats values that do not exactly match one of the values in the above list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Error if grade not listed - If a question contains any grades not found in the list an error is displayed and that question will not be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nearest grade if not listed - If a grade is found that does not match a value in the list, the grade is changed to the closest matching value in the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: some custom import formats write directly to the database and may bypass this check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; It may be easier and faster to type many questions into a &#039;&#039;&#039;single text file&#039;&#039;&#039;, than to create a series of Quiz or Lesson question pages.  Some teachers report that once they master creating questions in one of the formats to import, they do not have to wait for their Moodle site screen to refresh and the process of selecting the next question type to create.   &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Want to use questions from your quiz in a &#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;?  Export the question category in say a GIFT format, then use a text editor to delete questions, or perhaps use a search and replace function to change names or places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://vletools.com Moodle XML Converter] Convert your questions online into Moodle XML format. Allows to create questions from existing textfiles that should to be preformatted in a simple way. Supports TeX formulas, HTML and image embedded questions. Also can generate *.txt file from Moodle XML in case you need to export your questions in textfile.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder] converts commonly-used test generator output into Moodle XML. MoodleXMLBuilder currently supports converting tests and question banks created in Blackboard, ExamView, TestGen, and EZTest. Images are fully supported within all question fields where images are allowed within the Moodle quiz module.&lt;br /&gt;
* The help button link next to the import file button gives a lot of detail about each format in a popup window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51316 escaping problem in gift import?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Converting files to UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=202101 GIFT import - default grade] forum discussion &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Importar preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_inportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のインポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=108723</id>
		<title>Questionnaire Personality test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=108723"/>
		<updated>2014-01-05T12:19:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Chart display */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
A personality test is a tool that attempts to measure a person&#039;s social interaction skills and patterns of behavior. (US legal definition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Moodle Questionnaire add-on, the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature enables a questionnaire creator to attribute different &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; to the answers to certain types of questions. Those values can be added into scores - globally or in several &amp;quot;sections&amp;quot; - and relevant feedback messages based on those scores can be displayed to the respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the particular nature of the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature, great care should be exercised when using it in questionnaires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organization===&lt;br /&gt;
The following question types can be used with the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature: &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;. In order for the answers to those questions to be &amp;quot;scored&amp;quot;, they &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; have a &#039;&#039;&#039;question name&#039;&#039;&#039;, must be &#039;&#039;&#039;required&#039;&#039;&#039; and each of their choices must have a &#039;&#039;&#039;value&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039; question, the default values are 1 for a Yes answer and 0 for a No. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See the examples below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adapted from [http://www.personalitytest.net/funtest/hrdept.htm www.personalitytest.net]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039; (or Dropdown Box) question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;feel your best&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. We are giving question Q1 a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and setting it as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039; because we plan to use it in the Personality test feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: When do you feel your best?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***2=In the morning&lt;br /&gt;
***4=During the afternoon and early evening&lt;br /&gt;
***6=Late at night&lt;br /&gt;
Each possible answer choice begins with a value &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign (=) &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the choice words(*). The values attributed to the various choices must be carefully considered in order to obtain a coherent &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; when they are added up in the feedback score calculation. Here we are using the values as given in the &amp;quot;personality fun test&amp;quot; of our example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(*) &#039;&#039;&#039;No space&#039;&#039;&#039; before nor after the equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue to create all 10 questions in the sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select the first option available, i.e. Global Feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Since we have selected the Global feedback option, all those questions have been default-set in Section 1, the only section available here. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
Normally, you have nothing to change on that page. However you might want to remove one or several questions from the list by clicking the 0 radio button instead of the (Section) 1 button.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback heading=====&lt;br /&gt;
* This begins with a list of the names of all the questions that are used in this Global Feedback section.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039; text box should be kept as short as possible. It will be displayed in the Feedback report and - when the Chart feature is avaiblable in a later version of Questionnaire - will be used in the Charts.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the &#039;&#039;Heading&#039;&#039; field you may type a brief heading text. You may use 2 variables in this heading, $scorepercent and $oppositescorepercent. One example is: &amp;quot;You scored $scorepercent in this questionnaire.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback messages=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, still taken from our sample Personality &amp;quot;Fun&amp;quot; test.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as someone they should &amp;quot;handle with care&amp;quot; You&#039;re seen as vain, self-centered, and who is extremely dominant. Others may admire you, wishing they could be more like you, but don&#039;t always trust you, hesitating to become too deeply involved with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**94% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as an exciting, highly volatile, rather impulsive personality; a natural leader, who&#039;s quick to make decisions, though not always the right ones. [etc.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**85% &lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This starts with 3 default boundaries and associated messages, but you may add more boundaries if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 12-21-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This table shows the global score for respondent plus, if any, the average global score for all participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, this box may show the average global score for the group that the actual respondent belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first box of the Feedback Report we see the Heading text, which may include the value of the $scorepercent variable.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the second box we see the &amp;quot;personalized&amp;quot; feedback message, relevant to the Feedback score boundaries that the actual respondent&#039;s score sits in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the View all Responses page, the Feedback report heading will be displayed, together with the average Global score for All participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;visible&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, the average global score for the current group will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 13-42-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Several sections Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
A simplistic &amp;quot;health habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;sports&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you practise these sports?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***0=never&lt;br /&gt;
***1=once a month&lt;br /&gt;
***2=every week&lt;br /&gt;
***3=every day&lt;br /&gt;
***cycling&lt;br /&gt;
***running&lt;br /&gt;
***swimming&lt;br /&gt;
***walking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q2 as a &#039;&#039;yes/no&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;fruit and vegetables&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do you regularly eat fresh fruit and vegetables?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q3 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;smoking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you smoke?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one packet per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one packet per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one packet per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q4 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;drinking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you drink alcohol?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one glass per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one glass per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one glass per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select 2 Feedback sections.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-23-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the questions are not set into any Feedback Section (all radio buttons are set at 0). You now have to set each question into one of the 2 Sections you decided to display in your questionnaire&#039;s Feedback Report. At this stage, those 2 Feedback Sections have not yet been named, so you really have to be careful and make a mental note of &amp;quot;which is which&amp;quot;. Suppose you want Section 1 to be related to your respondents&#039; practise of sport, you would put question 1 into section 1 (click radio button 1 for that question). Now suppose you want your second section to be related to &amp;quot;healthy attitude&amp;quot; towards food, drinking and smoking; click all the remaining radio buttons &amp;quot;2&amp;quot; for questions 2, 3 and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose you get it wrong and you mistakenly put all of your questions in Section 1. Upon clicking on the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, this error message would be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;You must select at least ONE question per section!&lt;br /&gt;
Section(s) not selected: 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
You will now get a screen very similar to the one you get for Global Feedback messages (as in our previous example). But you will get several screens, one per section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** sports&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Physical activity&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;physical activity&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You must be very fit. Congratulations!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: Your physical activity is only average. Come on!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to be a real couch potato. Make an effort!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next section (2/2)&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** fruit and vegetables&lt;br /&gt;
** smoking&lt;br /&gt;
** drinking&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Healthy habits&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;healthy habits&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have quite healthy habits. Continue!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not very healthy habits. Make an effort to cut down on drinking and smoking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not terribly healthy habits. You must make a serious effort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-53-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This report is similar to the Global Feedback report in our previous example, except that now the score is separated into 2 sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bipolar results==&lt;br /&gt;
Some &amp;quot;personality tests&amp;quot; aim at detecting a bipolar characteristic in respondents&#039; character. For example, whether an individual&#039;s profile is rather visual or auditory, global or analytic, extrovert or introvert etc. See Julian Rotter&#039;s theory of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Julian_Rotter#Locus_of_control Locus of Control].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In such cases, you can enter the section labels as a set of 2 opposed (bipolar) concepts, separated by a pipe character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-58-51.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a questionnaire based on the Locus of Control theory, this &amp;quot;bipolar&amp;quot; heading will give the following kind of report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-13-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Chart display==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Upon installing or updating the Questionnaire plugin, its &amp;quot;site settings&amp;quot; page is displayed. On that &#039;&#039;Site administration ► Plugins ► Activity modules ► Questionnaire&#039;&#039; page, an admin can choose to enable the Chart feature site-wide. The default is &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; (do not enable). The Questionnaire Chart feature currently uses the [http://www.rgraph.net/ RGraph] libraries, which are licensed under the MIT type of open source license.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Chart types===&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the &#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039; page and click the &#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display or not the table of scores in the Feedback report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chart type drop down list that is available is dependent on the number of feedback sections in your questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Global Feedback (i.e. one section only): Bipolar bars or Vertical Progress bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 Sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
* More than 2 sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Radar or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your choice of Chart type depends on the type of questions in your questionnaire. It&#039;s up to you to find out the most suitable Chart type. The Bipolar bars type is only suited when your feedback sections include Bipolar_results (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected Chart will be displayed on the All Responses page. It will be constructed with all participants&#039; results or, if the questionnaire is set to Visible Groups, with the results of the currently selected group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On an Individual Responses page, the current user&#039;s current results Chart will be displayed, and also the All participants (or current group) results Chart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some samples illustrating the complete Chart types that can be used are displayed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical Progress bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-44-28.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bipolar bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-40-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horizontal bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-42-27.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-37-47.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-38-58.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=108641</id>
		<title>Questionnaire Personality test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=108641"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:53:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Feedback options */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
A personality test is a tool that attempts to measure a person&#039;s social interaction skills and patterns of behavior. (US legal definition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Moodle Questionnaire add-on, the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature enables a questionnaire creator to attribute different &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; to the answers to certain types of questions. Those values can be added into scores - globally or in several &amp;quot;sections&amp;quot; - and relevant feedback messages based on those scores can be displayed to the respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the particular nature of the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature, great care should be exercised when using it in questionnaires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organization===&lt;br /&gt;
The following question types can be used with the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature: &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;. In order for the answers to those questions to be &amp;quot;scored&amp;quot;, they &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; have a &#039;&#039;&#039;question name&#039;&#039;&#039;, must be &#039;&#039;&#039;required&#039;&#039;&#039; and each of their choices must have a &#039;&#039;&#039;value&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039; question, the default values are 1 for a Yes answer and 0 for a No. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See the examples below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adapted from [http://www.personalitytest.net/funtest/hrdept.htm www.personalitytest.net]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039; (or Dropdown Box) question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;feel your best&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. We are giving question Q1 a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and setting it as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039; because we plan to use it in the Personality test feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: When do you feel your best?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***2=In the morning&lt;br /&gt;
***4=During the afternoon and early evening&lt;br /&gt;
***6=Late at night&lt;br /&gt;
Each possible answer choice begins with a value &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign (=) &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the choice words(*). The values attributed to the various choices must be carefully considered in order to obtain a coherent &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; when they are added up in the feedback score calculation. Here we are using the values as given in the &amp;quot;personality fun test&amp;quot; of our example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(*) &#039;&#039;&#039;No space&#039;&#039;&#039; before nor after the equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue to create all 10 questions in the sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select the first option available, i.e. Global Feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Since we have selected the Global feedback option, all those questions have been default-set in Section 1, the only section available here. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
Normally, you have nothing to change on that page. However you might want to remove one or several questions from the list by clicking the 0 radio button instead of the (Section) 1 button.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback heading=====&lt;br /&gt;
* This begins with a list of the names of all the questions that are used in this Global Feedback section.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039; text box should be kept as short as possible. It will be displayed in the Feedback report and - when the Chart feature is avaiblable in a later version of Questionnaire - will be used in the Charts.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the &#039;&#039;Heading&#039;&#039; field you may type a brief heading text. You may use 2 variables in this heading, $scorepercent and $oppositescorepercent. One example is: &amp;quot;You scored $scorepercent in this questionnaire.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback messages=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, still taken from our sample Personality &amp;quot;Fun&amp;quot; test.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as someone they should &amp;quot;handle with care&amp;quot; You&#039;re seen as vain, self-centered, and who is extremely dominant. Others may admire you, wishing they could be more like you, but don&#039;t always trust you, hesitating to become too deeply involved with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**94% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as an exciting, highly volatile, rather impulsive personality; a natural leader, who&#039;s quick to make decisions, though not always the right ones. [etc.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**85% &lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This starts with 3 default boundaries and associated messages, but you may add more boundaries if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 12-21-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This table shows the global score for respondent plus, if any, the average global score for all participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, this box may show the average global score for the group that the actual respondent belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first box of the Feedback Report we see the Heading text, which may include the value of the $scorepercent variable.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the second box we see the &amp;quot;personalized&amp;quot; feedback message, relevant to the Feedback score boundaries that the actual respondent&#039;s score sits in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the View all Responses page, the Feedback report heading will be displayed, together with the average Global score for All participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;visible&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, the average global score for the current group will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 13-42-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Several sections Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
A simplistic &amp;quot;health habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;sports&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you practise these sports?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***0=never&lt;br /&gt;
***1=once a month&lt;br /&gt;
***2=every week&lt;br /&gt;
***3=every day&lt;br /&gt;
***cycling&lt;br /&gt;
***running&lt;br /&gt;
***swimming&lt;br /&gt;
***walking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q2 as a &#039;&#039;yes/no&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;fruit and vegetables&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do you regularly eat fresh fruit and vegetables?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q3 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;smoking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you smoke?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one packet per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one packet per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one packet per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q4 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;drinking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you drink alcohol?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one glass per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one glass per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one glass per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select 2 Feedback sections.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-23-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the questions are not set into any Feedback Section (all radio buttons are set at 0). You now have to set each question into one of the 2 Sections you decided to display in your questionnaire&#039;s Feedback Report. At this stage, those 2 Feedback Sections have not yet been named, so you really have to be careful and make a mental note of &amp;quot;which is which&amp;quot;. Suppose you want Section 1 to be related to your respondents&#039; practise of sport, you would put question 1 into section 1 (click radio button 1 for that question). Now suppose you want your second section to be related to &amp;quot;healthy attitude&amp;quot; towards food, drinking and smoking; click all the remaining radio buttons &amp;quot;2&amp;quot; for questions 2, 3 and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose you get it wrong and you mistakenly put all of your questions in Section 1. Upon clicking on the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, this error message would be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;You must select at least ONE question per section!&lt;br /&gt;
Section(s) not selected: 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
You will now get a screen very similar to the one you get for Global Feedback messages (as in our previous example). But you will get several screens, one per section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** sports&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Physical activity&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;physical activity&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You must be very fit. Congratulations!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: Your physical activity is only average. Come on!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to be a real couch potato. Make an effort!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next section (2/2)&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** fruit and vegetables&lt;br /&gt;
** smoking&lt;br /&gt;
** drinking&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Healthy habits&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;healthy habits&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have quite healthy habits. Continue!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not very healthy habits. Make an effort to cut down on drinking and smoking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not terribly healthy habits. You must make a serious effort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-53-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This report is similar to the Global Feedback report in our previous example, except that now the score is separated into 2 sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bipolar results==&lt;br /&gt;
Some &amp;quot;personality tests&amp;quot; aim at detecting a bipolar characteristic in respondents&#039; character. For example, whether an individual&#039;s profile is rather visual or auditory, global or analytic, extrovert or introvert etc. See Julian Rotter&#039;s theory of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Julian_Rotter#Locus_of_control Locus of Control].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In such cases, you can enter the section labels as a set of 2 opposed (bipolar) concepts, separated by a pipe character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-58-51.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a questionnaire based on the Locus of Control theory, this &amp;quot;bipolar&amp;quot; heading will give the following kind of report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-13-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Chart display==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- This feature is currently in Beta stage and only available from the github repository (Questionnaire version 2.6.3).&lt;br /&gt;
===Site settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Upon installing or updating the Questionnaire plugin, its &amp;quot;site settings&amp;quot; page is displayed. On that &#039;&#039;Site administration ► Plugins ► Activity modules ► Questionnaire&#039;&#039; page, an admin can choose to enable the Chart feature site-wide. The default is &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; (do not enable). The Questionnaire Chart feature currently uses the [http://www.rgraph.net/ RGraph] libraries, which are licensed under the MIT type of open source license.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Chart types===&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the &#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039; page and click the &#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display or not the table of scores in the Feedback report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chart type drop down list that is available is dependent on the number of feedback sections in your questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Global Feedback (i.e. one section only): Bipolar bars or Vertical Progress bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 Sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
* More than 2 sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Radar or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your choice of Chart type depends on the type of questions in your questionnaire. It&#039;s up to you to find out the most suitable Chart type. The Bipolar bars type is only suited when your feedback sections include Bipolar_results (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected Chart will be displayed on the All Responses page. It will be constructed with all participants&#039; results or, if the questionnaire is set to Visible Groups, with the results of the currently selected group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On an Individual Responses page, the current user&#039;s current results Chart will be displayed, and also the All participants (or current group) results Chart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some samples illustrating the complete Chart types that can be used are displayed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical Progress bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-44-28.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bipolar bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-40-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horizontal bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-42-27.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-37-47.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-38-58.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=108640</id>
		<title>Questionnaire Personality test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=Questionnaire_Personality_test&amp;diff=108640"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:53:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Feedback options */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questionnaire}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
A personality test is a tool that attempts to measure a person&#039;s social interaction skills and patterns of behavior. (US legal definition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Moodle Questionnaire add-on, the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature enables a questionnaire creator to attribute different &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; to the answers to certain types of questions. Those values can be added into scores - globally or in several &amp;quot;sections&amp;quot; - and relevant feedback messages based on those scores can be displayed to the respondent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the particular nature of the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature, great care should be exercised when using it in questionnaires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organization===&lt;br /&gt;
The following question types can be used with the &amp;quot;personality test&amp;quot; feature: &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Dropdown Box&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;. In order for the answers to those questions to be &amp;quot;scored&amp;quot;, they &#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039; have a &#039;&#039;&#039;question name&#039;&#039;&#039;, must be &#039;&#039;&#039;required&#039;&#039;&#039; and each of their choices must have a &#039;&#039;&#039;value&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the &#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039; question, the default values are 1 for a Yes answer and 0 for a No. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See the examples below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adapted from [http://www.personalitytest.net/funtest/hrdept.htm www.personalitytest.net]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Radio Buttons&#039;&#039; (or Dropdown Box) question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;feel your best&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;. We are giving question Q1 a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and setting it as &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039; because we plan to use it in the Personality test feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: When do you feel your best?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***2=In the morning&lt;br /&gt;
***4=During the afternoon and early evening&lt;br /&gt;
***6=Late at night&lt;br /&gt;
Each possible answer choice begins with a value &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the equal sign (=) &#039;&#039;immediately followed&#039;&#039; by the choice words(*). The values attributed to the various choices must be carefully considered in order to obtain a coherent &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; when they are added up in the feedback score calculation. Here we are using the values as given in the &amp;quot;personality fun test&amp;quot; of our example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(*) &#039;&#039;&#039;No space&#039;&#039;&#039; before nor after the equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue to create all 10 questions in the sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select the first option available, i.e. Global Feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Since we have selected the Global feedback option, all those questions have been default-set in Section 1, the only section available here. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
Normally, you have nothing to change on that page. However you might want to remove one or several questions from the list by clicking the 0 radio button instead of the (Section) 1 button.&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback heading=====&lt;br /&gt;
* This begins with a list of the names of all the questions that are used in this Global Feedback section.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039; text box should be kept as short as possible. It will be displayed in the Feedback report and - when the Chart feature is avaiblable in a later version of Questionnaire - will be used in the Charts.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the &#039;&#039;Heading&#039;&#039; field you may type a brief heading text. You may use 2 variables in this heading, $scorepercent and $oppositescorepercent. One example is: &amp;quot;You scored $scorepercent in this questionnaire.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Global Feedback messages=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, still taken from our sample Personality &amp;quot;Fun&amp;quot; test.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as someone they should &amp;quot;handle with care&amp;quot; You&#039;re seen as vain, self-centered, and who is extremely dominant. Others may admire you, wishing they could be more like you, but don&#039;t always trust you, hesitating to become too deeply involved with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**94% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback : Others see you as an exciting, highly volatile, rather impulsive personality; a natural leader, who&#039;s quick to make decisions, though not always the right ones. [etc.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**85% &lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This starts with 3 default boundaries and associated messages, but you may add more boundaries if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 12-21-49.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# This table shows the global score for respondent plus, if any, the average global score for all participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, this box may show the average global score for the group that the actual respondent belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the first box of the Feedback Report we see the Heading text, which may include the value of the $scorepercent variable.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the second box we see the &amp;quot;personalized&amp;quot; feedback message, relevant to the Feedback score boundaries that the actual respondent&#039;s score sits in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the View all Responses page, the Feedback report heading will be displayed, together with the average Global score for All participants. If the questionnaire is set to &amp;quot;visible&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;separate groups&amp;quot;, the average global score for the current group will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 13-42-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Several sections Feedback example==&lt;br /&gt;
A simplistic &amp;quot;health habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
===Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q1 as a &#039;&#039;Rate&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;sports&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you practise these sports?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***0=never&lt;br /&gt;
***1=once a month&lt;br /&gt;
***2=every week&lt;br /&gt;
***3=every day&lt;br /&gt;
***cycling&lt;br /&gt;
***running&lt;br /&gt;
***swimming&lt;br /&gt;
***walking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q2 as a &#039;&#039;yes/no&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;fruit and vegetables&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do you regularly eat fresh fruit and vegetables?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q3 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;smoking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you smoke?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one packet per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one packet per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one packet per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create Q4 as a &#039;&#039;Radio buttons&#039;&#039; question type&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;drinking&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Response Required&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Question Text&#039;&#039;&#039;: How often do you drink alcohol?&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Possible answers&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
***3=never&lt;br /&gt;
***2=less than one glass per month&lt;br /&gt;
***1=one glass per week&lt;br /&gt;
***0=one glass per day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the questionnaire&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Info====&lt;br /&gt;
As usual you may use the &#039;&#039;Additional Info&#039;&#039; field to enter instructions for the respondents.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback options====&lt;br /&gt;
Now that your questionnaire contains a number of questions which fill the requirements mentioned above for using the Personality test feature, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039;&#039; section is available. In the Feedback options dropdown box, select 2 Feedback sections.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the &#039;&#039;Feedback notes&#039;&#039; field to enter text which will be displayed to your repondents at the end of their &amp;quot;Feedback report&amp;quot;, e.g. external link to more information on the topic, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-23-55.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings and edit Feedback Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Sections====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page is displayed the full list of the questions available for the Feedback report. Each question is displayed, and the &amp;quot;value&amp;quot; of each choice is displayed, to help you check their coherence.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the questions are not set into any Feedback Section (all radio buttons are set at 0). You now have to set each question into one of the 2 Sections you decided to display in your questionnaire&#039;s Feedback Report. At this stage, those 2 Feedback Sections have not yet been named, so you really have to be careful and make a mental note of &amp;quot;which is which&amp;quot;. Suppose you want Section 1 to be related to your respondents&#039; practise of sport, you would put question 1 into section 1 (click radio button 1 for that question). Now suppose you want your second section to be related to &amp;quot;healthy attitude&amp;quot; towards food, drinking and smoking; click all the remaining radio buttons &amp;quot;2&amp;quot; for questions 2, 3 and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose you get it wrong and you mistakenly put all of your questions in Section 1. Upon clicking on the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, this error message would be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;You must select at least ONE question per section!&lt;br /&gt;
Section(s) not selected: 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Sections settings and edit Feedback Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing Questionnaire Feedback Messages====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
You will now get a screen very similar to the one you get for Global Feedback messages (as in our previous example). But you will get several screens, one per section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** sports&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Physical activity&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;physical activity&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 1/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You must be very fit. Congratulations!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: Your physical activity is only average. Come on!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to be a real couch potato. Make an effort!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next section (2/2)&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback heading for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions in this section:&lt;br /&gt;
** fruit and vegetables&lt;br /&gt;
** smoking&lt;br /&gt;
** drinking&lt;br /&gt;
* Label: Healthy habits&lt;br /&gt;
* Heading: Your &amp;quot;healthy habits&amp;quot; score is $scorepercent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Feedback messages for section 2/2=====&lt;br /&gt;
This works exactly the same as the Moodle Quiz Score boundary system.&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few examples, taken from our sample &amp;quot;Healthy habits&amp;quot; questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**100% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have quite healthy habits. Continue!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**66% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not very healthy habits. Make an effort to cut down on drinking and smoking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Feedback Score boundary&lt;br /&gt;
**33% &lt;br /&gt;
**Feedback: You seem to have not terribly healthy habits. You must make a serious effort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When finished, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report===&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the Feedback report will look like to a respondent after taking our sample questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-53-07.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This report is similar to the Global Feedback report in our previous example, except that now the score is separated into 2 sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bipolar results==&lt;br /&gt;
Some &amp;quot;personality tests&amp;quot; aim at detecting a bipolar characteristic in respondents&#039; character. For example, whether an individual&#039;s profile is rather visual or auditory, global or analytic, extrovert or introvert etc. See Julian Rotter&#039;s theory of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Julian_Rotter#Locus_of_control Locus of Control].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In such cases, you can enter the section labels as a set of 2 opposed (bipolar) concepts, separated by a pipe character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 14-58-51.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a questionnaire based on the Locus of Control theory, this &amp;quot;bipolar&amp;quot; heading will give the following kind of report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:03-12-2013 15-13-09.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Chart display==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.- This feature is currently in Beta stage and only available from the github repository (Questionnaire version 2.6.3).&lt;br /&gt;
===Site settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Upon installing or updating the Questionnaire plugin, its &amp;quot;site settings&amp;quot; page is displayed. On that &#039;&#039;Site administration ► Plugins ► Activity modules ► Questionnaire&#039;&#039; page, an admin can choose to enable the Chart feature site-wide. The default is &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; (do not enable). The Questionnaire Chart feature currently uses the [http://www.rgraph.net/ RGraph] libraries, which are licensed under the MIT type of open source license.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback options===&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the &#039;&#039;Advanced settings&#039;&#039; page and click the &#039;&#039;Feedback options&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display or not the table of scores in the Feedback report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chart type drop down list that is available is dependent on the number of feedback sections in your questionnaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Global Feedback (i.e. one section only): Bipolar bars or Vertical Progress bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 Sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
* More than 2 sections: Bipolar bars or Horizontal bars or Radar or Rose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your choice of Chart type depends on the type of questions in your questionnaire. It&#039;s up to you to find out the most suitable Chart type. The Bipolar bars type is only suited when your feedback sections include Bipolar_results (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected Chart will be displayed on the All Responses page. It will be constructed with all participants&#039; results or, if the questionnaire is set to Visible Groups, with the results of the currently selected group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On an Individual Responses page, the current user&#039;s current results Chart will be displayed, and also the All participants (or current group) results Chart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some samples illustrating the complete Chart types that can be used are displayed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vertical Progress bar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-44-28.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bipolar bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-40-05.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horizontal bars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-42-27.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-37-47.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:02-01-2014 11-38-58.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-38-58.jpg&amp;diff=108638</id>
		<title>File:02-01-2014 11-38-58.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-38-58.jpg&amp;diff=108638"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:52:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-37-47.jpg&amp;diff=108637</id>
		<title>File:02-01-2014 11-37-47.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-37-47.jpg&amp;diff=108637"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:51:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-42-27.jpg&amp;diff=108636</id>
		<title>File:02-01-2014 11-42-27.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-42-27.jpg&amp;diff=108636"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:51:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-40-05.jpg&amp;diff=108634</id>
		<title>File:02-01-2014 11-40-05.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-40-05.jpg&amp;diff=108634"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:49:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-44-28.jpg&amp;diff=108633</id>
		<title>File:02-01-2014 11-44-28.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/27/en/index.php?title=File:02-01-2014_11-44-28.jpg&amp;diff=108633"/>
		<updated>2014-01-02T10:46:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>